05.08.2013 Views

imagine the possibilities - ManageMyLife

imagine the possibilities - ManageMyLife

imagine the possibilities - ManageMyLife

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>imagine</strong> <strong>the</strong> <strong>possibilities</strong><br />

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product<br />

To receive more complete service, please register<br />

your proauct al<br />

www.samsung.comiregister<br />

Mode Serial No,


Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.<br />

Product design and specifications may be changed without notice,<br />

_ See <strong>the</strong> warranty card for more information on warranty terms.<br />

Wide screen format LCD Displays (16:9, <strong>the</strong> aspect ratio of <strong>the</strong> screen width to height) are primarily designed to view wide screen format full-motion video.<br />

The images displayed on <strong>the</strong>m should pdmadlybe in <strong>the</strong> wide screen 16:9 ratio format, or expanded to fill<strong>the</strong> screen if your model offers this feature and<br />

<strong>the</strong> images are constantly moving. Displayingstationary graphics and images on screen, such as <strong>the</strong> dark sidebars on no expanded standard format<br />

television video and programming, should be limited to no more than 5% of <strong>the</strong> total television viewing per week.<br />

Addkionally, viewing o<strong>the</strong>r stationary images and text such as stock market reports, video game displays, station Iogos,web sitesor computer graphics<br />

and patterns, should be limited as described above for all televisions. Displaying stationary imagesthat exceed <strong>the</strong> above guidelines can cause uneven<br />

aging of LCD Displays that leavesubtle, but permanent burned-in ghost images in <strong>the</strong> LCD picture. To avoidthis, vary <strong>the</strong> programming and images, and<br />

primarily display full screen moving images, not stationary patterns or dark bars. On LCD models that offer picture sizing features, use <strong>the</strong>se controls to<br />

view differentformats as afull screen picture.<br />

Be careful in <strong>the</strong> selection and duration of televisionformats used for viewing. Uneven LCD aging as a result of format selection and use, as well as burned<br />

in images, are not covered by your Samsung limitedwarranty.<br />

• SAMSUNG ELECTRONICSNORTHAMERICAN LIMITEDWARRANTY STATEMENT<br />

Subject to <strong>the</strong> requirements, conditions, exclusions and limitations of <strong>the</strong> original Limited Warranty supplied with Samsung Electronics (SAMSUNG)<br />

products, and <strong>the</strong> requirements, conditions, exclusions and limitations contained herein,SAMSUNG will additionally provide Warranty Repair Service<br />

in <strong>the</strong> United States on SAMSUNG products purchased in Canada, and in Canada on SAMSUNG products purchased in <strong>the</strong> United States, for <strong>the</strong><br />

warranty period originallyspecified, and to <strong>the</strong> Original Purchaseronly.<br />

The above described warranty repairs must be performed by a SAMSUNG Authorized Service (}enter. Along with this Statement <strong>the</strong> Original Limited<br />

Warranty Statement and a dated Bill of Sale as Proof of Purchase must be presented to <strong>the</strong> Service Center. Transportation to and from <strong>the</strong> Service<br />

Center is <strong>the</strong> responsibility of <strong>the</strong> purchaser.Conditions covered are limited only to manufacturing defects in materialor workmanship, and only those<br />

encountered in normal use of <strong>the</strong> product.<br />

Excluded, but not limitedto, are any originally specified provisions for, in-home or on-site services, minimum or maximum repairtimes, exchanges or<br />

replacements, accessories, options, upgrades, or consumables.<br />

For <strong>the</strong> location of a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center, please call toll-free:<br />

- In <strong>the</strong> United States : 1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864)<br />

- In Canada : 1-800-SAMSUNG<br />

Avoid displaying still images (such as jpeg picture files)or still imageelements (such asTV channel Iogos, panorama or 4:3 image format, stock or news<br />

bars at screen bottom etc.) on <strong>the</strong> screen. Constant displaying of still picture can cause ghosting of LCD screen, which will affect image quality. To reduce<br />

risk of this effect, please follow below recommendations:<br />

• Avoid displaying <strong>the</strong> same TV channel for long periods.<br />

• Always try to display afull screen image.<br />

• Reducing brightness and contrast will helpto avoid<strong>the</strong> appearance of after-images.<br />

• Use all TVfeatures designed to reduce image retention and screen burn, referto proper user manual section for details.<br />

Keep <strong>the</strong> required distances between <strong>the</strong> product and o<strong>the</strong>r objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation.<br />

Failingto do so may result in fire or a problem with <strong>the</strong> product due to an increase in <strong>the</strong> internaltemperature of <strong>the</strong> product.<br />

'_bs When usinga stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronicsonly.<br />

• Ifyou use parts provided by ano<strong>the</strong>r manufacturer, it may result in a problem with <strong>the</strong> product or an injurydue to <strong>the</strong> product falling.<br />

_ws The appearance may differdepending on <strong>the</strong> product.<br />

Be careful when you contact <strong>the</strong> TV because some parts carsbe somewhat hot.<br />

4 inche<br />

',<br />

t<br />

"[ 4 inches ,,<br />

inches<br />

m m<br />

English<br />

ii


Contents<br />

• List of Features ......................................................... 4<br />

• Accessories .............................................................. 4<br />

• Install<strong>the</strong> Stand ........................................................ 5<br />

• Viewing <strong>the</strong> Control Panel ......................................... 6<br />

• Viewing <strong>the</strong> Remote Control ...................................... 7<br />

• Connecting to an Antenna ........................................ 8 •<br />

• Plug & Play (Initial Setup) ........................................... 8<br />

• Connecting to an AV Device ...................................... 9<br />

• Connecting to an Audio Device ............................... 11<br />

• Connecting to a PC ..................................................<br />

• Changing <strong>the</strong> Input Source ..................................... 13<br />

• How to Navigate Menus .......................................... 13<br />

• Channel Menu ........................................................ 14<br />

Seeing Channels 14<br />

Using FavoriteChannels 14<br />

Memorizing Channels 14<br />

Editing Channels 15<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r Features 15<br />

• Picture Menu .......................................................... 16<br />

Changing <strong>the</strong> Preset Picture Mode 16<br />

Adjusting Picture Settings 16<br />

Changing <strong>the</strong> Picture Options 16<br />

Setting up <strong>the</strong> TV with your PC 18<br />

• Sound Menu ........................................................... 19<br />

Changing <strong>the</strong> Preset Sound Mode 19<br />

Adjusting sound settings 19<br />

Sound Settings 19<br />

Thisfunctioncanbe usedbypressing<strong>the</strong><br />

TOOLSbuttonon<strong>the</strong> remotecontrol.<br />

Check <strong>the</strong> Symbol!<br />

o<br />

Setup Menu ............................................................ 20<br />

Setting <strong>the</strong> Time 20<br />

Using <strong>the</strong> Sleep Timer 20<br />

Setting <strong>the</strong> On/Off Timer 20<br />

Locking Programs 21<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r Features 22<br />

Economical Solutions 23<br />

Suppo_ Menu ......................................................... 24<br />

• Media Play .............................................................. 25<br />

Connecting a USB Device 25<br />

Using <strong>the</strong> Media Play Menu 25<br />

• Installing <strong>the</strong> Wall Mount ......................................... 29<br />

• Anti-<strong>the</strong>ft Kensington Lock ...................................... 30<br />

• Securing <strong>the</strong> TV to <strong>the</strong> Wall ..................................... 31<br />

• Troubleshooting ...................................................... 32<br />

Storage and Maintenance 34<br />

• License ................................................................... 35<br />

• Specifications ......................................................... 35<br />

• Dimensions ............................................................. 36<br />

• Index ...................................................................... 37<br />

Note<br />

Indicatesadditionalinformation.<br />

®<br />

Step by Step Guide<br />

Check here for instructions on how to open<br />

<strong>the</strong> relevant submenu within <strong>the</strong> OSD (on<br />

screen display).<br />

English 3


Getting Started<br />

• Excellent Digital Interface & Networking: With a built-in HD digital tuner, nonsubscription HD broadcasts can be viewed<br />

without a cable box / STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver.<br />

• Media Play: Allows you to play music files and pictures saved on a USB device (p. 25).<br />

• Self Diagnosis: You can check to make sure picture and sound operate normally (p. 24).<br />

Please make sure <strong>the</strong> following items are included with your LOD TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer.<br />

The items' colors and shapes may vary depending on <strong>the</strong> models.<br />

Input Cables (Sold Separately)<br />

: 8+ : iDVi:: m :n+ +_T,S!: 8:+!V<br />

English


Seeseparate guide forinstalling <strong>the</strong>stand.<br />

Fellow <strong>the</strong> steps below to connect <strong>the</strong> TV to <strong>the</strong> stand.<br />

or<br />

Stand-- _-:'_ .... _<br />

Connect <strong>the</strong> Guide Stand to <strong>the</strong> Stand using four screws (M4 X L12) as shown.<br />

(M4 X L12)<br />

2. With your TV upright, connect <strong>the</strong> TV to <strong>the</strong> Stand. 3. Fasten two screws (M4 X L12) at position O, and <strong>the</strong>n<br />

fasten two screws (M4 X L12) at position O.<br />

NOTE<br />

* Make sure to distinguish between <strong>the</strong> front and back of <strong>the</strong> Stand and Guide Stand when assembling <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

* Make sure that at least two persons lift and move <strong>the</strong> LCD TV.<br />

* Stand <strong>the</strong> product up and fasten <strong>the</strong> screws. If you fasten <strong>the</strong> screws with <strong>the</strong> LCD TV placed down, it may lean to<br />

one side.<br />

English 5


Getting Started<br />

The product color and shape may vary depending on <strong>the</strong> model.<br />

Speakers<br />

Remote control sensor<br />

SOUROEE_<br />

_V_CNU<br />

--VOL+<br />

VCHA<br />

Power Indicator<br />

(b (Powert<br />

Standby mode<br />

q.• SOURCE_<br />

Remotecontrolsensor Powerindicator<br />

MENU -VOL+ v CH ,A. ,<br />

Aim <strong>the</strong> remote control towards this spot on <strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

Toggles between all <strong>the</strong> available input sources. In <strong>the</strong> on-screen menu, use this<br />

button as you would use <strong>the</strong> ENTER E_ button on <strong>the</strong> remote control.<br />

Displays an on-screen menu, <strong>the</strong> OSD (on screen display) of your TV's features,<br />

Adjusts <strong>the</strong> volume. In <strong>the</strong> OSD, use <strong>the</strong> --VOL÷ buttons as you would use <strong>the</strong><br />

4 and _, buttons on <strong>the</strong> remote control.<br />

Changes <strong>the</strong> channels. In <strong>the</strong> OSD, use <strong>the</strong> V CH A buttons as you would use <strong>the</strong><br />

and A buttons on <strong>the</strong> remote control.<br />

Blinks and turns off when <strong>the</strong> power is on and lights up in standby mode.<br />

Turns <strong>the</strong> TV on or off.<br />

Do not leave your TV in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on a holiday, for example). A small amount<br />

of electric power is still consumed even when <strong>the</strong> power button is turned off. It is best to unplug <strong>the</strong> power cord.<br />

English


Turns <strong>the</strong> TV on and off. Displaysand selects <strong>the</strong> availaMevideo<br />

sources (p. 13).<br />

Pressto directly access channels.<br />

Press to select additional channels<br />

(digital) being broadcasted by tile same II<br />

station. For example, to select channel I|<br />

"54-3", press "54", <strong>the</strong>n press "-" and,,3,,. I t<br />

Adjusts <strong>the</strong> volume.<br />

Displays Media Play (USB) (p. 25).<br />

Quickly select frequently used functions.<br />

Returns to <strong>the</strong> previous menu.<br />

Buttons used in <strong>the</strong> Channel List,<br />

Media Play (USB) menu, etc.<br />

Installing batteries (Battery size: AAA)<br />

\<br />

NOTE<br />

Returns to <strong>the</strong> previous channel.<br />

Cuts off <strong>the</strong> sound temporarily.<br />

Changes channels.<br />

Displays <strong>the</strong> channel list on <strong>the</strong> screen<br />

(p. 14).<br />

Displays Favorite Channel Lists on <strong>the</strong><br />

screen (p. 14).<br />

Displays information on tile TV screen.<br />

Selects <strong>the</strong> on-screen menu items and<br />

changes tile values seen on <strong>the</strong> menu.<br />

Exits tile menu.<br />

MTS: Press to choose stereo, mono<br />

or Separate Audio Program (SAP<br />

broadcast) (p.19).<br />

RSlZE: Selects <strong>the</strong> picture size (p. 17).<br />

CO: Controls <strong>the</strong> caption decoder<br />

(p. 22).<br />

* Use <strong>the</strong> remote control within 23 feet from <strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

* Bright light may affect <strong>the</strong> performance of <strong>the</strong> remote<br />

control. Avoid use when nearby fluorescent lights or neon<br />

signs.<br />

* The color and shape may vary depending on <strong>the</strong> model.<br />

English 7


Getting Started<br />

When <strong>the</strong> TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically,<br />

Connecting <strong>the</strong> power cord and antenna,<br />

ntenna a e o u _e<br />

Or<br />

VHF/UHFAntenna<br />

When <strong>the</strong> TV is initially powered on, a sequence of on-screen prompts will assist in configuring basic settings. Press <strong>the</strong><br />

POWER (b button. Plug & Play is available only when <strong>the</strong> input source is set to TV.<br />

1<br />

To return to <strong>the</strong> previous step, press <strong>the</strong> Red button.<br />

Selecting a language<br />

Selecting Store Demo<br />

or Home Use<br />

Selecting an antenr<br />

Selecung a channel<br />

Setting <strong>the</strong> Clock<br />

Mode<br />

View <strong>the</strong> HDTV<br />

Connection Guide<br />

Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERC_ button.<br />

Select <strong>the</strong> desired OSD (On Screen Display) language.<br />

Press <strong>the</strong> 41 or I_ button, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERE_ button.<br />

• Select <strong>the</strong> Home Use mode. Store Demo Mode is for retail<br />

environments.<br />

• To return <strong>the</strong> unit's settings from Store Demo to Home Use<br />

(standard): Press <strong>the</strong> volume button on <strong>the</strong> TV. When you<br />

see <strong>the</strong> volume OSD, press and hold MENU for 5 sec.<br />

POWER<br />

Press <strong>the</strong> A or _r button, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button. Select Air, Cable or Auto.<br />

Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERE_ button. Select <strong>the</strong> channel source<br />

to memorize. When setting <strong>the</strong> antenna source to Cable, a step appears allowing you to<br />

ass'gn numerical values (channel frequencies) to <strong>the</strong> channels. For more information, refer to<br />

Channel--_ Auto Program (p. 14).<br />

Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button at any time to interrupt <strong>the</strong> memorization process.<br />

Set <strong>the</strong> Clock Mode automatically or manually.<br />

• Auto: Allows you to select DST (Daylight Saving Time) mode and time zone.<br />

• Manual: Allows you to manually set <strong>the</strong> current date and time (p. 20).<br />

The connection method for <strong>the</strong> best HD screen quality is displayed.<br />

Enjoy <strong>the</strong> "IV. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

if You Want to Reset This Feature...<br />

(_ MENU rlTl _ Setup _ Plug & Play _ ENTERI_<br />

English


Connections<br />

Using an HDMI or HDMI/DVI Cable: HD connection (up to 1080p)<br />

We recommend using <strong>the</strong> HDMI connection for <strong>the</strong> best quality HD picture.<br />

Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, HD cable box, HD STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver<br />

HDMI (DV_}_N/ DVI AUDIO _N<br />

HDM_ Cable (Not Supplied/<br />

* When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use <strong>the</strong> HDMI (DVm}_Njack for video. A DVD, Blu-ray<br />

player, HD cable box, or HD STB satellite receiver may require a DVI-HDMI (DVI to HDMI) cable or DVI-HDMI<br />

(DVI to HDMI) adapter. The DW AUDIO _Njack is required for audio.<br />

* The picture may not display normally (if at all) or <strong>the</strong> audio may not work if an external device that uses an older<br />

version of HDMI mode is connected to <strong>the</strong> TV. If such a problem occurs, ask <strong>the</strong> manufacturer of <strong>the</strong> external<br />

device about <strong>the</strong> HDMI version and, if out of date, request an upgrade.<br />

* Be sure to purchase a certified HDMI cable. O<strong>the</strong>rwise, <strong>the</strong> picture may not display or a connection error may<br />

occur,<br />

I<br />

English 9


Connections<br />

Using a Component (up to 1080p) or Audio/Video (480i only) Cable<br />

Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, cable box, STB satellite receiver, VCR<br />

For better picture quality, <strong>the</strong> Component connection is recommended over <strong>the</strong> A/V connection,<br />

Using an EX-Link Cable Connection<br />

Available devices: External devices that support EX-Link.<br />

0 English<br />

EX UNK: Connector for service only.


Using an Optical (Digital) Cable Connection<br />

Available devices: Digital Audio System, Amplifier, DVD home <strong>the</strong>ater<br />

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL}<br />

" When a digital audio system is connected to <strong>the</strong> DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL} jack, decrease <strong>the</strong> volume<br />

of both <strong>the</strong> TV and <strong>the</strong> system.<br />

" 5,1 OH (channel) audio is available when <strong>the</strong> TV is connected to an external device supporting 5.1 OH.<br />

" When <strong>the</strong> receiver (amplifier or DVD home <strong>the</strong>ater) is set to on, you can hear sound output from <strong>the</strong> TV's<br />

optical jack. When <strong>the</strong> TV is receiving a DTV signal, <strong>the</strong> TV will send 5,1 OH sound to <strong>the</strong> amplifier or DVD<br />

home <strong>the</strong>ater, When <strong>the</strong> source is a digital component such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB<br />

(Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver and is connected to <strong>the</strong> TV via HDMI, only 2 OH audio will be heard from <strong>the</strong><br />

amplifier or DVD home <strong>the</strong>ater. If you want to hear 5,1 CH audio, connect <strong>the</strong> digital audio out jack from your<br />

DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver directly to an amplifier or home <strong>the</strong>ater.<br />

Englishii


Connections<br />

Using an HDMI/DVI Cable or a D-sub Cable<br />

Display Modes (D-Sub and HDMI/DVl input)<br />

Optimal resolution is 1920 X 1080 @ 60 Hz,<br />

IBM<br />

MAC<br />

VESA CVT<br />

VESA DMT<br />

VESA GTF<br />

VESA DMT/DTV CEA<br />

NOTE<br />

640 x 850<br />

720 x 400<br />

640 x 480<br />

832 x 624<br />

1152 x 870<br />

720 x 576<br />

1152 x 864<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 960<br />

640 x 480<br />

640 x 480<br />

640 x 480<br />

800 x 600<br />

800 x 600<br />

800 x 600<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1152 x 864<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 800<br />

1280 x 800<br />

1280 x 960<br />

1360 x 768<br />

1440 x 900<br />

1440 x 900<br />

1680 x 1050<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1920 x 1080p<br />

31.469<br />

31.469<br />

35.000<br />

49.726<br />

68.681<br />

35.910<br />

53.783<br />

56.456<br />

75.231<br />

31.469<br />

37.861<br />

37.500<br />

37.879<br />

48.077<br />

46.875<br />

48.363<br />

56.476<br />

60.023<br />

67.500<br />

63.981<br />

79.976<br />

45.000<br />

49.702<br />

62.795<br />

60.000<br />

47.712<br />

55.935<br />

70.635<br />

65.290<br />

52.500<br />

74.620<br />

67.500<br />

70.086<br />

70.087<br />

66.667<br />

74.551<br />

75.062<br />

59.950<br />

59.959<br />

74.777<br />

74.857<br />

59.940<br />

72.809<br />

75.000<br />

60.317<br />

72.188<br />

75.000<br />

60.004<br />

70.069<br />

75.029<br />

75.000<br />

60.020<br />

75.025<br />

60.000<br />

59.810<br />

74.934<br />

60.000<br />

60.015<br />

59.887<br />

74.984<br />

59.954<br />

70.000<br />

70.000<br />

60.000<br />

" For HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use <strong>the</strong> HDM_ (DV_)_Njack.<br />

" The interlace mode is not supported.<br />

" The set may operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected.<br />

Audio Cable (Not Supplied}<br />

" Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG(Sync On Green)is not supported.<br />

2 English<br />

25.175<br />

28.322<br />

30.240<br />

57.284<br />

100.000<br />

32.750<br />

81.750<br />

95.750<br />

130.000<br />

25.175<br />

31.500<br />

31.500<br />

40.000<br />

50.000<br />

49.500<br />

65.000<br />

75.000<br />

78.750<br />

108.000<br />

108.000<br />

135.000<br />

74.250<br />

83.500<br />

106.500<br />

108.000<br />

85.500<br />

106.500<br />

136.750<br />

146.250<br />

89.040<br />

128.943<br />

148.500<br />

+/_<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

+/+


Source List<br />

Use to select TV or an external input sources<br />

such as a DVD / Bin-ray player / cable box /<br />

STB satellite receiver.<br />

MENU rrrl -_ input _ Source List<br />

ENTER I_<br />

m IV / AV / Component / PC / HDMI/DVI<br />

You can only choose external devices that<br />

are connected to <strong>the</strong> TV. In <strong>the</strong> Source List,<br />

connected inputs will be highlighted.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> Source List, PC is always activated.<br />

Basic Features<br />

SOURCE<br />

Before using <strong>the</strong> TV, follow <strong>the</strong> steps below to learn how to<br />

navigate <strong>the</strong> menu and select and adjust different functions.<br />

@<br />

II<br />

O MENU button: Displays <strong>the</strong> main on-screen menu.<br />

O ENTERE_ / Direction button: Move <strong>the</strong> cursor and<br />

select an item. Confirm <strong>the</strong> setting.<br />

RETURN button: Returns to <strong>the</strong> previous menu.<br />

EXIT button: Exits <strong>the</strong> on-screen menu.<br />

Edit Name<br />

MENU ITTI_ Input _ Edit Name _ ENTERI_<br />

VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB<br />

/ AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVmPC /<br />

DVm/ TV / mPrv / Bin-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Name <strong>the</strong><br />

device connected to <strong>the</strong> input jacks to make your input<br />

source selection easier.<br />

When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz is<br />

connected to <strong>the</strong> HDM_ (DVl) _Nport, you should set<br />

<strong>the</strong> TV DVI PC mode under Edit Name.<br />

When connecting an HDMI/DVI cable to <strong>the</strong> HDM_<br />

(DW} _N port, you should set <strong>the</strong> TV to DVl PC or DVl<br />

mode under Edit Name.<br />

How to Operate <strong>the</strong> OSD (On Screen Display)<br />

The access step may differ depending on <strong>the</strong> selected menu.<br />

MENU rm The main menu options appear on<br />

<strong>the</strong> screen:<br />

Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup,<br />

input, Application, Support.<br />

_' (_k Select an icon with <strong>the</strong> A or T<br />

button,<br />

ENTER C_ Press ENTER I_ to access <strong>the</strong><br />

@ eub-menu.<br />

! v<br />

ii, iiii !i' il ill<br />

Select <strong>the</strong> desired eubmenu with<br />

<strong>the</strong> A or T button.<br />

Adjust <strong>the</strong> value of an item with <strong>the</strong><br />

4 or _ button. The adjustment in<br />

<strong>the</strong> OSD may differ depending on<br />

<strong>the</strong> selected menu.<br />

ENTERE_ Press ENTERI_ to confirm <strong>the</strong><br />

selection.<br />

_EXIT-_IJ Press EXIT.<br />

English 13


Basic Features<br />

Seeing Channels<br />

Channel List<br />

Add, delete or set Favorite channels and use<br />

<strong>the</strong> program guide for digital broadcasts.<br />

(_ MENU rrr] --_ Channel _ Channel List<br />

ENTERI_<br />

Select a channel in <strong>the</strong> All Channels,<br />

Added Channels, Favorite or Programmed<br />

screen by pressing <strong>the</strong> A / T and ENTERI_<br />

buttons. Then you can watch <strong>the</strong> selected channel,<br />

m _All Channels: Shows all currently available channels.<br />

m _ Added Channels: Shows all added channels.<br />

m _ Favorite: Shows all favorite channels.<br />

m _ Programmed: Shows all currently reserved<br />

programs.<br />

Using <strong>the</strong> color buttons with <strong>the</strong> Channel List<br />

* Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel<br />

number.<br />

* Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists.<br />

Select desired channels and press <strong>the</strong> Yellow button<br />

to set all <strong>the</strong> selected channels at <strong>the</strong> same time. The<br />

_/mark appears to <strong>the</strong> left of <strong>the</strong> selected channels.<br />

* _-_ (Tools): Displays <strong>the</strong> Channel List option menu.<br />

(The options menus may differ depending on <strong>the</strong><br />

situation.)<br />

Channel Status Display icons<br />

_/ A channel selected.<br />

V A channel set as a Favorite,<br />

(_) A reserved Program,<br />

4 English<br />

Using Favorite Channels<br />

(_ MENU ITTI_ Channel --_ Channel List --_ ENTERI_<br />

Add to Favorite / Delete from Favorite<br />

Set channels you watch frequently as Favorites,<br />

1. Select a channel and press <strong>the</strong> TOOLS button.<br />

2. Add or delete a <strong>the</strong> channel using <strong>the</strong> Add to Favorite<br />

or Delete from Favorite menu respectively,<br />

I<br />

To show all Favorite channels, click on <strong>the</strong><br />

button shown on <strong>the</strong> right.<br />

Memorizing Channels<br />

(_ MENUITTI _ Channel --_ ENTERE_<br />

Antenna (Air / Cable)<br />

Before your television can begin memorizing <strong>the</strong> available<br />

channels, you must specify <strong>the</strong> type of signal source that is<br />

connected to <strong>the</strong> TV (i,e. an Air or a Cable system).<br />

Auto Program<br />

Ill Air: Air antenna signal.<br />

Ill Cable: Cable antenna signal.<br />

Ill Auto: Air and Cable antenna.


NOTE<br />

When selecting <strong>the</strong>Cable TVsystem: STD,HRC<br />

andIRCidentify various typesofcableTVsystems.<br />

Contact your local cablecompany toidentify <strong>the</strong><br />

typeofcablesystem thatexists inyourparticular<br />

area. Atthispoint, <strong>the</strong>signal source hasbeen<br />

selected.<br />

* After all<strong>the</strong>available channels arestored, itstarts<br />

toremove scrambled channels. TheAutoProgram<br />

menu <strong>the</strong>nreappears.<br />

Editing Channels<br />

MENUITTI --_ Channel _ Channel List --_ ENTER{_<br />

Channel Name Edit<br />

1. Select a channel and press <strong>the</strong> TOOLS button.<br />

2. Edit <strong>the</strong> channel name using <strong>the</strong> Channel Name Edit<br />

menu.<br />

ml Channel Name Edit (analog channels only): Assign your<br />

own channel name.<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r Features<br />

MENUITTI --_ Channel _ ENTERI_<br />

Clear Scrambled Channel<br />

This function is used to filter out scrambled channels after<br />

Auto Program is completed. This process may take up to<br />

20-30 minutes.<br />

How to Stop Searching Scrambled Channels<br />

1. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERC_ button to select Stop.<br />

2. Press <strong>the</strong> _ button to select Yes.<br />

3. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

This function is only available in Cable mode.<br />

Channel List<br />

MENUITTI --_ Channel _ Channel List --_ ENTER{_<br />

Channel List Option Menu<br />

Set each channel using <strong>the</strong> Channel List menu options (Add<br />

/ Delete, Timer Viewing, Select All/Deselect All). Option<br />

menu items may differ depending on <strong>the</strong> channel status.<br />

1. Select a channel and press <strong>the</strong> TOOLS button.<br />

2. Select a function and change its settings.<br />

ml Add / Delete: Delete or add a channel to display <strong>the</strong><br />

channels you want.<br />

m<br />

m<br />

NOTE<br />

* All deleted channels will be shown on <strong>the</strong><br />

All Channels menu.<br />

* A gray-colored channel indicates <strong>the</strong> channel<br />

has been deleted.<br />

* The Add menu only appears for deleted<br />

channels.<br />

* Delete a channel from <strong>the</strong> Added Channels or<br />

Favorite menu in <strong>the</strong> same manner.<br />

Timer Viewing: You can set a desired channel to be<br />

displayed automatically at <strong>the</strong> reserved time. Set <strong>the</strong><br />

current time first to use this function.<br />

1. Press <strong>the</strong> _ / _ / A / _ buttons to select <strong>the</strong><br />

desired channel in Channel List.<br />

2. Press <strong>the</strong> TOOLS button, <strong>the</strong>n select<br />

Timer Viewing.<br />

3. Scroll up or down to adjust <strong>the</strong> settings in <strong>the</strong> box,<br />

or use <strong>the</strong> numeric buttons on your remote to enter<br />

<strong>the</strong> date and time.<br />

If you selected Once, Every Week or Everyday<br />

in Repeat, you can enter <strong>the</strong> date you want.<br />

4. Select OK, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button when<br />

done.<br />

NOTE<br />

* Only memorized channels can be reserved.<br />

* Reserved programs will be displayed in <strong>the</strong><br />

Programmed menu.<br />

* When a digital channel is selected, press <strong>the</strong> _,<br />

button to view <strong>the</strong> digital program.<br />

Select All: Select all <strong>the</strong> channels in <strong>the</strong> channel list.<br />

Deselect All: Deselect all <strong>the</strong> selected channels.<br />

You can only select Deselect All when one or<br />

more channels are selected.<br />

@ Programmed .................................................................<br />

(in Channel List)<br />

You can view, modify or delete a show you have reserved<br />

to watch. Programmed timer viewing is displayed here.<br />

Highlight a program and press <strong>the</strong> TOOLS button to display<br />

Options.<br />

ml Change mnfo:Change a show you have reserved to<br />

watch. Begin with step 3 of "Timer Viewing" above,<br />

ml Cancel Schedules: Cancel a show you have reserved<br />

to watch.<br />

This deletes <strong>the</strong> highlighted or selected<br />

program(s).<br />

English 15


Basic Features<br />

m<br />

m<br />

Information: Display a show you have reserved<br />

to watch. (You can also change <strong>the</strong> reservation<br />

Information.)<br />

Alternatively, you can view Information by<br />

highlighting a program and pressing <strong>the</strong><br />

ENTERI_ button.<br />

Select All / Deselect All: Select or deselect all reserved<br />

programs.<br />

Fine Tune<br />

(analog channels only)<br />

if <strong>the</strong> reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune <strong>the</strong><br />

channel, as this is done automatically during <strong>the</strong> search and<br />

store operation, if <strong>the</strong> signal is weak or distorted, fine tune<br />

<strong>the</strong> channel manually. Scroll to <strong>the</strong> left or right until <strong>the</strong> image<br />

is clear.<br />

Settings are applied to <strong>the</strong> channel you're currently<br />

watching,<br />

Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked<br />

with an asterisk ..... on <strong>the</strong> right-hand side of <strong>the</strong><br />

channel number in <strong>the</strong> channel banner.<br />

To reset <strong>the</strong> fine-tuning, select Reset,<br />

Changing <strong>the</strong> Preset Picture Mode<br />

(_ MENUiTrl --_ Picture _ Mode --_ ENTERIZ_<br />

Mode<br />

Select your preferred picture type.<br />

Ill Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room.<br />

Ill Standard: Suitable for a normal environment.<br />

Ill Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room.<br />

6 English<br />

Adjusting Picture Settings<br />

Backlight / Contrast / Brightness /<br />

Sharpness / Color / Tint (G/R)<br />

(_ MENUrlTI --_ Picture _ ENTERI_<br />

Your television has several setting options for picture quality<br />

control,<br />

NOTE<br />

* When you make changes to Backiight, Contrast,<br />

Brightness, Sharpness, Color or Tint (G/R), <strong>the</strong><br />

OSD will be adjusted accordingly.<br />

* In PC mode, you can only make changes to<br />

Backlight, Contrast and Brightness.<br />

* Settings can be adjusted and stored for each<br />

external device connected to <strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

Changing <strong>the</strong> Picture Options<br />

Advanced Settings ............................................................<br />

(_ MENUrlTI --_ Picture _ Advanced Settings --_<br />

ENTER I_<br />

(Advanced Settings are available in Standard / Movie mode)<br />

Compared to previous models, new Samsung TVs have a<br />

more precise picture.<br />

In PC mode, you can only make changes to<br />

Gamma and White Balance.


im<br />

im<br />

im<br />

im<br />

im<br />

im<br />

im<br />

BlackTone(Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest): Select <strong>the</strong><br />

black level to adjust <strong>the</strong> screen depth.<br />

Dynamic Contrast (Off / Low / Medium / High): Adjust<br />

<strong>the</strong> screen contrast.<br />

Gamma: Adjust <strong>the</strong> primary color intensity.<br />

Color Space (Auto / Native): Adjust <strong>the</strong> range of colors<br />

available to create <strong>the</strong> image.<br />

White Balance: Adjust <strong>the</strong> color temperature for a more<br />

natural picture.<br />

R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each color's<br />

(red, green, blue) darkness.<br />

R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each color's (red,<br />

green, blue) brightness.<br />

Reset: Resets <strong>the</strong> White Balance to it's default<br />

settings,<br />

Flesh Tone: Emphasize pink "Flesh Tone."<br />

Edge Enhancement<br />

boundaries.<br />

(Off/On): Emphasize object<br />

In PC mode, you can only make changes to <strong>the</strong><br />

Color Tone and Size.<br />

m Size: Your cable box/satellite receiver<br />

may have its own set of screen sizes as<br />

well. However, we highly recommend you<br />

use 16:9 mode most of <strong>the</strong> time.<br />

16:9 : Sets <strong>the</strong> picture to 16:9 wide<br />

mode.<br />

Zoom1 : Use for moderate magnification.<br />

Zoom2: Use for a stronger magnification.<br />

Wide Fit: Enlarges <strong>the</strong> aspect ratio of <strong>the</strong> picture to fit<br />

<strong>the</strong> entire screen.<br />

Available with HD 1080i / 720p signals in 16:9<br />

mode.<br />

4:3 : Sets <strong>the</strong> picture to basic (4:3) mode.<br />

Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long time. Traces<br />

of borders displayed on <strong>the</strong> left, right and center<br />

of <strong>the</strong> screen may cause image retention(screen<br />

burn) which are not covered by <strong>the</strong> warranty.<br />

Screen Fit: Displays <strong>the</strong> full image without any cut-off<br />

when HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component<br />

(1080i / 1080p) signals are inputted.<br />

P!cture<br />

NOTE<br />

OPtions ........................................................................................................................................................<br />

After selecting Zoom1, Zoom2 or Wide Fit:<br />

[_ MENUiTFI --_ Picture _ Picture Options --_<br />

1. Press <strong>the</strong> I_ button to select Position.<br />

ENTER I_<br />

2. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERIZ_ button.<br />

Im Color Tone (Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2)<br />

Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated when <strong>the</strong><br />

picture mode is Dynamic and Standard.<br />

Settings can be adjusted and stored for each<br />

external device connected to an input on <strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

3. Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button to move <strong>the</strong> picture up<br />

or down.<br />

4. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

5. Press <strong>the</strong> !_ button to select Reset.<br />

6. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERIZ_ button to reset <strong>the</strong> picture<br />

to its default position.<br />

English 17


Basic Features<br />

After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i/1080p) or<br />

Component (1080i/1080p) mode, you may need to<br />

center <strong>the</strong> picture:<br />

1. Press <strong>the</strong> _ or _ button to select Position.<br />

2. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

3. Press <strong>the</strong> A, _r, _ or !_ button to move <strong>the</strong><br />

picture.<br />

4. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERIZ_ button.<br />

5. Press <strong>the</strong> _ or _ button to select Reset,<br />

6. Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

* HD (High Definition): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080),<br />

720p (1280x720)<br />

* Settings can be adjusted and stored for each<br />

external device you have connected to an input on<br />

<strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

ATV,AV, 16:9, Zoom1,<br />

Component (480i, 480p) Zoom2, 4:3<br />

DTV(1080i), 16:9, 4:3, Wide Fit,<br />

Component (1080i, 1080p), Screen Fit<br />

HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p)<br />

PC 16:9, 4:3<br />

m Digital NR (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto): If <strong>the</strong><br />

broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can<br />

activate <strong>the</strong> Digital NR feature to reduce any static and<br />

ghosting that may appear on <strong>the</strong> screen.<br />

8 English<br />

When <strong>the</strong> signal is weak, try o<strong>the</strong>r options until <strong>the</strong><br />

best picture is displayed.<br />

HDMI Black Level (Normal / Low): Selects <strong>the</strong> black<br />

level on <strong>the</strong> screen to adjust <strong>the</strong> screen depth.<br />

Available only in HDMI mode.<br />

Film Mode (Off / Auto): Sets <strong>the</strong> TV to automatically<br />

sense and process film signals from all sources and<br />

adjusts <strong>the</strong> picture for optimum quality.<br />

Available in TV, AV, COMPONENT (480i/1080i)<br />

and HDMI (480i/1080i),<br />

Picture Reset (OK / Cancel)<br />

Resets your current picture mode to its default settings.<br />

Setting up <strong>the</strong> TV with your PC<br />

Set <strong>the</strong> input source to PC.<br />

(_ MENUrlTI --_ Picture _ ENTERE_<br />

Auto Adjustment .................................................................<br />

Adjust frequency values/positions and fine tune <strong>the</strong> settings<br />

automatically.<br />

Not available when connecting with an HDMI/DVI cable.<br />

Screen<br />

Ill Coarse / Fine: Removes or reduces picture noise. If <strong>the</strong><br />

noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone, <strong>the</strong>n adjust<br />

<strong>the</strong> frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Finetune<br />

again. After <strong>the</strong> noise has been reduced, readjust<br />

<strong>the</strong> picture so that it is aligned to <strong>the</strong> center of screen.<br />

Ill PC Position: Adjust <strong>the</strong> PC's screen positioning if it<br />

does not fit <strong>the</strong> TV screen. Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button to<br />

adjust <strong>the</strong> Vertical-Position. Press <strong>the</strong> _ or !_ button to<br />

adjust <strong>the</strong> Horizontal-Position.<br />

Ill Image Reset: Resets <strong>the</strong> image to default settings.


Using Your iV as a Computer (PC) Display<br />

Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)<br />

Depending on <strong>the</strong> version of Windows and <strong>the</strong> video card,<br />

<strong>the</strong> actual screens on your PC will probably look different, but<br />

<strong>the</strong> same basic set-up information will apply in most cases.<br />

(If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung<br />

Dealer.)<br />

1. Click on "Control Panel" on <strong>the</strong> Windows start menu.<br />

2. Click on "Appearance and Themes" in <strong>the</strong> "Control<br />

Panel" window and a display dialog-box will appear.<br />

3. Click on "Display" and a display dialog box will appear.<br />

4. Navigate to <strong>the</strong> "Settings" tab on <strong>the</strong> display dialog-box.<br />

• The correct size setting (resolution) [Optimum: 1920 X<br />

1080 pixels]<br />

• If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display<br />

settings dialog box, <strong>the</strong> correct value is "60" or "60 Hz'.<br />

O<strong>the</strong>rwise, just click "OK" and exit <strong>the</strong> dialog box.<br />

Changing <strong>the</strong> Preset Sound Mode<br />

{_ MENU rlTI -_ Sound -_ Mode -_ ENTERE_<br />

Mode<br />

[] Standard: Selects <strong>the</strong> normal sound mode.<br />

[] Music: Emphasizes music over voices.<br />

[] Movie: Provides <strong>the</strong> best sound for movies.<br />

[] Clear Voice: Emphasizes voices over o<strong>the</strong>r sounds.<br />

[] Custom: Increase <strong>the</strong> intensity of high-frequency sound<br />

to allow a better listening experience for <strong>the</strong> hearing<br />

impaired.<br />

Adjusting sound settings<br />

(_ MENU iTrl --_ Sound -_ Equalizer -_ ENTER E_<br />

Equalizer<br />

The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal<br />

preference.<br />

[] Mode: Selects <strong>the</strong> sound mode among <strong>the</strong> predefined<br />

settings.<br />

[] Balance L/R: Adjusts <strong>the</strong> balance between <strong>the</strong> right and<br />

left speaker.<br />

[] 100Nz / 300Hz / 1 kNz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth<br />

Adjustment): Adjusts <strong>the</strong> level of specific bandwidth<br />

frequencies.<br />

[] Reset: Resets <strong>the</strong> equalizer to its default settings.<br />

Sound Settings<br />

(_ MENUiTrl --_ Sound --_ ENTERI_%_<br />

SRS TruSurround HD (Off / On)......................................<br />

This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound<br />

experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head<br />

Related Transfer Function) technology.<br />

Preferred Language<br />

(digital channels only)<br />

DigitaI-TV broadcasts are capable of<br />

simultaneous transmission of many audio tracks<br />

(for example, simultaneous translations of <strong>the</strong><br />

program into foreign languages).<br />

You can only select a language among <strong>the</strong><br />

ones being broadcasted.<br />

Multi-Track Sound (MTS)<br />

(analog channels only)<br />

[] Mono: Choose for channels that are<br />

broadcasting in mono or if you are having<br />

difficulty receiving a stereo signal.<br />

[] Stereo: Choose for channels that are<br />

broadcasting in stereo.<br />

[] SAP: Choose to listen to <strong>the</strong> Separate<br />

Audio Program, which is usually a foreign-language<br />

translation.<br />

Depending on <strong>the</strong> particular program being broadcast,<br />

you can listen to Mono, Stereo or SAR<br />

Auto Volume (Off / Normal) ..............................................<br />

Because each broadcasting station has its own signal<br />

conditions, <strong>the</strong> volume can vary as you switch between<br />

channels. This feature lets you automatically adjust <strong>the</strong><br />

volume of <strong>the</strong> desired channel by lowering <strong>the</strong> sound output<br />

when <strong>the</strong> modulation signal is high or by raising <strong>the</strong> sound<br />

output when <strong>the</strong> modulation signal is low,<br />

English lg


Basic Features<br />

Speaker Select (External Speaker /<br />

TV Spea ker ).............................................................<br />

A sound echo may occur due to a difference in decoding<br />

speed between <strong>the</strong> main speaker and <strong>the</strong> audio receiver, In<br />

this case, set <strong>the</strong> TV to External Speaker.<br />

When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, <strong>the</strong><br />

volume and MUTE buttons will not operate and <strong>the</strong><br />

sound settings will be limited,<br />

When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker,<br />

* TV Speaker: Off, External Speaker: On<br />

When Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker,<br />

* TV Speaker: On, External Speaker: On<br />

If <strong>the</strong>re is no video signal, both speakers will be mute,<br />

Sound Reset (OK / Cancel)<br />

Reset all sound settings to <strong>the</strong> factory defaults.<br />

Setting <strong>the</strong> Time<br />

(_ MENUiTR _Setup--_Time--_ENTERlZ_<br />

Time<br />

Clock: Setting <strong>the</strong> clock is for using various timer<br />

features of <strong>the</strong> 7_.<br />

(_ The current time will appear every time you press<br />

<strong>the</strong> _NFO button.<br />

if you disconnect <strong>the</strong> power cord, you have to set<br />

<strong>the</strong> clock again.<br />

Clock Mode (Auto / Manual)<br />

- Auto: Set <strong>the</strong> current time automatically using <strong>the</strong><br />

time from a digital channel.<br />

The antenna must be connected in order to set<br />

<strong>the</strong> time automatically,<br />

- Manual: Set <strong>the</strong> current time manually.<br />

Depending on <strong>the</strong> broadcast station and signal,<br />

<strong>the</strong> auto time set up may not be correct, in this<br />

case, set <strong>the</strong> time manually.<br />

0 English<br />

Clock Set: Set <strong>the</strong> Month, Day, Year, Hour, Minute and<br />

am/pm manually.<br />

Available only when Clock Mode is set to<br />

Manual.<br />

You can set <strong>the</strong> Month, Day, Year, Hour and<br />

Minute directly by pressing <strong>the</strong> number buttons<br />

on <strong>the</strong> remote control.<br />

Time Zone: Select your time zone.<br />

This function is only available when <strong>the</strong><br />

Clock Mode is set to Auto.<br />

DST (Daylight Saving Time) (Off / On): Switches <strong>the</strong><br />

Daylight Saving Time function on or off.<br />

This function is only available when <strong>the</strong><br />

Clock Mode is set to Auto.<br />

Using <strong>the</strong> Sleep Timer<br />

(_ MENUiTR --_ Setup _ Time _ Sleep Timer --_<br />

ENTER IZ_<br />

Sleep Timer _: Automatically shuts off <strong>the</strong> TV<br />

after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and<br />

180 minutes).<br />

To cancel <strong>the</strong> Sleep Timer, select Off.<br />

Setting <strong>the</strong> On/Off Timer<br />

(_ MENUE]] --_ Setup _ Time _ Timer 1 --_<br />

ENTER I_<br />

You can set <strong>the</strong> TV to turn on automatically at a preset time.<br />

Ill Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3: Three different on / off<br />

timer settings can be made. You must set <strong>the</strong> clock first.


OnTime/ Off Time: Set <strong>the</strong> hour, minute, and activate<br />

/ inactivate, (Toactivate <strong>the</strong> timer with <strong>the</strong> setting you've<br />

chosen, set to Activate,)<br />

Volume: Set <strong>the</strong> desired volume level.<br />

Contents: Select rv or USB content to be played when<br />

<strong>the</strong> TV is turned on automatically, (USB can be selected<br />

only when a USB device is connected to <strong>the</strong> TV)<br />

NOTE<br />

If <strong>the</strong>re is no music file on <strong>the</strong> USB device or <strong>the</strong><br />

folder containing a music file is not selected, <strong>the</strong><br />

Timer function does not operate correctly.<br />

When <strong>the</strong>re is only one photo file in <strong>the</strong> USB,<br />

<strong>the</strong> Slide Show will not play.<br />

If a folder name is too long, <strong>the</strong> folder cannot be<br />

selected.<br />

Each USB you use is assigned its own folder.<br />

When using more than one of <strong>the</strong> same type of<br />

USB, make sure <strong>the</strong> folders assigned to each<br />

USB have different names.<br />

Repeat: Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat,<br />

Sat~Sun or Manual to set at you convenience. If you<br />

select Manual, you can set up <strong>the</strong> day you want to<br />

activate <strong>the</strong> timer.<br />

The _/ mark indicates <strong>the</strong> day is selected.<br />

Auto Power Off (available only when <strong>the</strong> TV is turned<br />

on by <strong>the</strong> Timer): The TV will be automatically turned off<br />

after 3 hours of being left idle to prevent overheating.<br />

Locking Programs<br />

(_ MENUiTR -_ Setup -_ ENTERE_<br />

V-Chip<br />

The PIN input screen appears, Enter your 4 digit PIN number.<br />

The V-Chip feature automatically locks out programs that are<br />

deemed inappropriate for children. The user must enter a<br />

PIN (personal identification number) before any of <strong>the</strong> V-Chip<br />

restrictions are set up or changed.<br />

NOTE<br />

* V-Chip is not available in HDML Component or PC<br />

mode.<br />

* The default PIN number of a new TV set is "0-0-0-0".<br />

* Allow All: Press to unlock all TV ratings.<br />

* Block All: Press to lock all TV ratings.<br />

II V-Chip Lock (Off / On): You can block rated TV<br />

Programs.<br />

Ill TV Parental Guidelines: You can block TV programs<br />

depending on <strong>the</strong>ir rating. This function allows you to<br />

control what your children are watching,<br />

- TV-Y: Young children / TV-Y7: Children 7 and over /<br />

rV-G: General audience / rV-PG: Parental guidance<br />

/ TV-14: Viewers 14 and over / TV-MA: Mature<br />

audience<br />

- ALL: Lock all TV ratings. / FV: Fantasy violence /<br />

V: Violence / S: Sexual situation / L: Adult Language /<br />

D: Sexually Suggestive Dialog<br />

The V-Chip will automatically block certain<br />

categories dealing with more sensitive material.<br />

For example, if you block <strong>the</strong> TV-¥ category,<br />

<strong>the</strong>n TV-Y7 will automatically be blocked.<br />

Similarly, if you block <strong>the</strong> TV-G category, <strong>the</strong>n<br />

all <strong>the</strong> categories in <strong>the</strong> young adult group will<br />

be blocked (TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 and TV-MA),<br />

The sub-ratings (D, L, S, V) work similarly. So,<br />

if you block <strong>the</strong> L sub-rating in TV-PG, <strong>the</strong>n<br />

<strong>the</strong> L sub-ratings in TV-14 and TV-MA will<br />

automatically be blocked.<br />

II MPAA Rating: You can block movies depending on<br />

<strong>the</strong>ir MPAA rating, The Motion Picture Association of<br />

America(MPAA) has implemented a rating system that<br />

provides parents or guardians with advanced information<br />

on which films are appropriate for children.<br />

- G: General audience (no restrictions). / PG: Parental<br />

guidance suggested. / PG-13: Parents strongly<br />

cautioned. / R: Restricted, Children under 17 should<br />

be accompanied by an adult. / NO-17: No children<br />

under age 17. / X: Adults only. / NR: Not rated.<br />

The V-Chip will automatically block any<br />

category that deals with more sensitive material.<br />

For example, if you block <strong>the</strong> PG-13 category,<br />

<strong>the</strong>n R, N0-17 and X will automatically be<br />

blocked.<br />

Canadian English: You can block TV programs<br />

depending on <strong>the</strong>ir Anglophone Canadian ratings.<br />

- C: Programming intended for children under age 8. /<br />

08+: Programming generally considered acceptable<br />

for children 8 years and over to watch on <strong>the</strong>ir own.<br />

/ G: General programming, suitable for all audiences.<br />

/ PG: Parental Guidance. / 14+: Programming<br />

contains <strong>the</strong>mes or content which may not be<br />

suitable for viewers under <strong>the</strong> age of 14. / 18+: Adult<br />

programming.<br />

The V-Chip will automatically block any<br />

category that deals with more sensitive material.<br />

For example, if you block <strong>the</strong> G category, <strong>the</strong>n<br />

PG, 14+ and 18+ will automatically be blocked.<br />

English 21


Basic Features<br />

m<br />

m<br />

m<br />

Canadian French: You can block TV programs<br />

depending on <strong>the</strong>ir French Canadian rating.<br />

- G: General / 8 ans+: Programming generally<br />

considered acceptable for children 8 years and over<br />

to watch on <strong>the</strong>ir own. / 13 arts+: Programming may<br />

not be suitable for children under <strong>the</strong> age of 13. /<br />

16 arts+: Programming is not suitable for children<br />

under <strong>the</strong> age of 16. / 18 arts+: Programming<br />

restricted to adults.<br />

The V-Chip will automatically block any<br />

category that deals with more sensitive material.<br />

For example, if you block <strong>the</strong> 8 ans+ category,<br />

<strong>the</strong>n 13 ans+, 16 arts+ and 18 ans+ will<br />

automatically be blocked also.<br />

Downloadable U.S. Rating: Parental restriction<br />

information can be used while watching DTV channels.<br />

NOTE<br />

If information is not downloaded from <strong>the</strong><br />

broadcasting station, <strong>the</strong> Downloadable U.S.<br />

Rating menu is deactivated,<br />

Parental restriction information is automatically<br />

downloaded while watching DTV channels. It<br />

may take several seconds,<br />

The Downloadable U.S. Rating menu<br />

is available for use after information is<br />

downloaded from <strong>the</strong> broadcasting station.<br />

However, depending on <strong>the</strong> information from<br />

<strong>the</strong> broadcasting station, it may not be available<br />

for use.<br />

Parental restriction levels differ depending on<br />

<strong>the</strong> broadcasting station. The default menu<br />

name and Downloadable US Rating change<br />

depending on <strong>the</strong> downloaded information.<br />

Even if you set <strong>the</strong> on-screen display to ano<strong>the</strong>r<br />

language, <strong>the</strong> Downloadable U.S. Rating<br />

menu will appear in English only.<br />

The rating will automatically block certain<br />

categories that deal with more sensitive<br />

material.<br />

The rating titles (For example: Humor Level_etc)<br />

and TV ratings (For example: DH, MH, H.,etc)<br />

may differ depending on <strong>the</strong> broadcasting<br />

station.<br />

Change PIN: The Change PIN screen will appear.<br />

Choose any 4 digits for your PIN and enter <strong>the</strong>m. As<br />

soon as <strong>the</strong> 4 digits are entered, <strong>the</strong> Confirm New<br />

PIN screen appears. Re-enter <strong>the</strong> same 4 digits. When<br />

<strong>the</strong> Confirm screen disappears, your PIN has been<br />

memorized.<br />

2 English<br />

How to watch a restricted channel<br />

If <strong>the</strong> TV is tuned to a restricted channel, <strong>the</strong> V-Chip will<br />

block it. The screen will go blank and <strong>the</strong> following message<br />

will appear:<br />

This channel is blocked by V-Chip. Please enter <strong>the</strong> PIN to<br />

unblock.<br />

If you forget <strong>the</strong> PIN, press <strong>the</strong> remote-control buttons<br />

in <strong>the</strong> following sequence, which resets <strong>the</strong> pin to<br />

"0-0-0-0:" POWER (off) _ MUTE --_ 8 --_ 2 --_4 --_<br />

POWER(on).<br />

O<strong>the</strong>r Features<br />

(_ MENUIITI --_ Setup _ ENTERE_<br />

Language<br />

Set <strong>the</strong> menu language,<br />

1. Select Language and press <strong>the</strong> ENTERE_ button.<br />

2. Choose desired language and press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_<br />

button.<br />

Choose between English, EspaSol and Frangais.<br />

Caption ..................................................................................<br />

(On-Screen Text Messages)<br />

Ill Caption (Off / On): You can switch <strong>the</strong><br />

caption function on or off. If captions are<br />

not available, <strong>the</strong>y will not be displayed<br />

on <strong>the</strong> screen.<br />

The Caption feature doesn't work in<br />

Component, HDMI or PC modes.<br />

Ill Caption Mode: You can select <strong>the</strong><br />

desired caption mode.<br />

The availability of captions depends on <strong>the</strong><br />

program being broadcast.<br />

Default / OO1~004 / Text1 ~Text4: (analog channels<br />

only) The Analog Caption function operates in ei<strong>the</strong>r<br />

analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied<br />

from an external device to <strong>the</strong> T_. (Depending on <strong>the</strong><br />

broadcasting signal, <strong>the</strong> Analog Caption function may or<br />

may not work with digital channels.)<br />

Default / Service1 ~Service6 / OO1 ~004 /<br />

Text1 ~Text4: (digital channels only) The Digital Captions<br />

function works with digital channels.<br />

Service1~6 may not be available in digital caption<br />

mode depending on <strong>the</strong> broadcast.


m Digital Caption Options: (digital channels only)<br />

Size:Options include Default, Small, Standard and<br />

Large. Thedefault isStandard,<br />

FontStyle: Options include Default andStyles 0to7.<br />

Thedefault isStyle0.<br />

Foreground Color: Options include Default, White,<br />

Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta andCyan, You<br />

canchange <strong>the</strong>color of<strong>the</strong>letter. Thedefault isWhite.<br />

Background Color:Options include Default, White,<br />

Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta andCyan.<br />

Youcanchange <strong>the</strong>background color of<strong>the</strong>caption.<br />

Thedefault isBlack.<br />

Foreground Opacity: Thisadjusts <strong>the</strong>opacity oftext.<br />

Options include Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid<br />

andFlashing.<br />

Background Opacity: Thisadjusts <strong>the</strong>opacity of<br />

<strong>the</strong>caption background. Options include Default,<br />

Transparent, Translucent, SolidandFlashing.<br />

Return toDefault: Thisoption setseachSize, Font<br />

Style, Foreground Color, Background Color, Foreground<br />

Opacity andBackground Opacity toitsdefault.<br />

NOTE<br />

* Digital Caption Options areavailable only<br />

whenDefault andService1 ~Service6 canbe<br />

selected inCaption Mode.<br />

* Theavailability ofcaptions depends on<strong>the</strong><br />

program beingbroadcasted.<br />

* TheDefault setting follows <strong>the</strong>standards setby<br />

<strong>the</strong>broadcaster.<br />

* TheForeground andBackground cannot beset<br />

tohave<strong>the</strong>samecolor.<br />

* Youcannot setboth<strong>the</strong>Foreground Opacity<br />

and<strong>the</strong>Background Opacity toTransparent.<br />

Game Mode (Off / On)<br />

When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation TM<br />

or Xbox TM, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience<br />

by selecting <strong>the</strong> game mode.<br />

NOTE<br />

* Precautions and limitations for game mode.<br />

- To disconnect <strong>the</strong> game console and connect<br />

ano<strong>the</strong>r external device, set Game Mode to Off in<br />

<strong>the</strong> setup menu.<br />

- If you display <strong>the</strong> TV menu in Game Mode, <strong>the</strong><br />

screen shakes slightly.<br />

* Game Mode is not available when <strong>the</strong> input source<br />

is set to TV or PC.<br />

* After connecting <strong>the</strong> game console, set Game Mode<br />

to On. Unfortunately, you may notice reduced picture<br />

quality.<br />

* If Game Mode is On:<br />

- Picture mode is set to Standard and Sound mode<br />

is set to Movie.<br />

- Equalizer is not available.<br />

Melody (Off / Low / Medium / High)<br />

Set so that a melody plays when <strong>the</strong> TV is turned on or off.<br />

NOTE<br />

* The Melody does not play.<br />

- When no sound is output from <strong>the</strong> TV because <strong>the</strong><br />

MUTE button has been pressed.<br />

- When no sound is output from <strong>the</strong> TV because <strong>the</strong><br />

volume has been reduced to minimum with <strong>the</strong><br />

VOL- button.<br />

- When <strong>the</strong> TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function.<br />

Economical Solutions<br />

(_ MENUITTI --_ Setup _ ENTER[_<br />

The Eco Function can be used to enhance your power<br />

savings.<br />

Energy Saving (Off / Low / Medium / High<br />

!Auto) ....................................................................................<br />

This feature adjusts <strong>the</strong> brightness of <strong>the</strong> TV in order to<br />

reduce power consumption. When watching TV at night,<br />

set <strong>the</strong> Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye<br />

fatigue as well as power consumption.<br />

English 23


Basic Features<br />

_} MENU[[]] _, Support _ ENTERE_<br />

Self Diagnosis<br />

Self Diagnostic might take few seconds, this is part of<br />

<strong>the</strong> normal operation of <strong>the</strong> TV,<br />

Ill Picture Test: Use to check for picture problems.<br />

Yes: If <strong>the</strong> test pattern does not appear or <strong>the</strong>re is<br />

noise in <strong>the</strong> test pattern, select Yes, There may be a<br />

problem with <strong>the</strong> TV. Contact Samsung's Call Center for<br />

assistance (1-800-SAMSUNG).<br />

No: If <strong>the</strong> test pattern is properly displayed, select No.<br />

There may be a problem with your external equipment,<br />

Please check your connections, If <strong>the</strong> problem persists,<br />

refer to <strong>the</strong> external device's user manual.<br />

Ill Sound Test: Use <strong>the</strong> built-in melody sound to check for<br />

sound problems.<br />

If you hear no sound from <strong>the</strong> TV's speakers,<br />

before performing <strong>the</strong> sound test, make sure<br />

Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker in <strong>the</strong><br />

Sound menu,<br />

The melody will be heard during <strong>the</strong> test even if<br />

Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or <strong>the</strong><br />

sound is muted by pressing <strong>the</strong> MUTE button.<br />

Yes: If you can hear sound only from one speaker or not<br />

at all during <strong>the</strong> sound test, select Yes, There may be a<br />

problem with <strong>the</strong> TV. Contact Samsung's Call Center for<br />

assistance (1-800-SAMSUNG).<br />

No: If you can hear sound from <strong>the</strong> speakers, select No.<br />

There may be a problem with your external equipment,<br />

Please check your connections, If <strong>the</strong> problem persists,<br />

refer to <strong>the</strong> external device's user manual.<br />

Ill Signal Strength: (Digital channels only) An HD channel's<br />

reception quality is ei<strong>the</strong>r perfect or <strong>the</strong> channels are<br />

unavailable. Adjust your antenna to increase signal<br />

strength.<br />

4 English<br />

Software U pgrade<br />

Samsung may offer upgrades for your TV's firmware in <strong>the</strong><br />

future. Please visit Samsung.com or contact <strong>the</strong> Samsung<br />

call center at 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) to receive<br />

information about downloading upgrades and using a USB<br />

drive. Upgrades will be possible by connecting a USB drive<br />

to <strong>the</strong> USB port.<br />

When software is upgraded, video and audio settings<br />

you have made will return to <strong>the</strong>ir default (factory)<br />

settings,<br />

We recommend you write down your settings so that<br />

you can easily reset <strong>the</strong>m after <strong>the</strong> upgrade,<br />

HD Connection Guide<br />

Refer to this information when connecting external devices<br />

to <strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

Contact Samsung ..............................................................<br />

View this information when your TV does not work properly<br />

or when you want to upgrade <strong>the</strong> software. You can find<br />

information regarding our call centers and how to download<br />

products and software.


Advanced Features<br />

Enjoy photos and/or music files saved on a USB<br />

Mass Storage Class (MSO) device.<br />

{_ MENU iTrl -_ Application _ Media Play<br />

(USB) _ ENTERIZ_<br />

Connecting a USB Device<br />

1. Turn on your TV.<br />

2. Connect a USB device containing photo and/or music files to <strong>the</strong> USB jack on <strong>the</strong><br />

rear of <strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

3. When USB is connected to <strong>the</strong> TV, popup window appears. Then you can select<br />

Media Play.<br />

Using <strong>the</strong> Media Play Menu<br />

Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show)<br />

1. Press <strong>the</strong> MENU button. Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button to select<br />

Application, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

2. Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button to select Media Play (USB), <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong><br />

ENTER E_ button.<br />

3. Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button to select <strong>the</strong> corresponding USB Memory<br />

Device, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

The Media Play menu differs depending on <strong>the</strong> USB Memory<br />

Device connected to TV.<br />

Some devices may not be supported due to compatibility<br />

problems.<br />

4. Press <strong>the</strong> _1 or I_ button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Setup),<br />

<strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

It might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files.<br />

Need-to-Know List before using Media Play (USB)<br />

" Only alphanumeric characters must be used as a folder name or file name (photo, music).<br />

USB Drive<br />

TV Rear Panel<br />

" The file system only supports FAT16/32 (The NTFS file system is not supported) Certain types of USB Digital camera<br />

and audio devices may not be compatible with this TM<br />

" Media Play (USB) only supports <strong>the</strong> USB Mass Storage Class device (MSC). MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only<br />

Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives and Flash Card Readers (Both USB HDD and HUB are not<br />

supported.)<br />

" Before connecting your device to <strong>the</strong> TV, please back up your files to prevent <strong>the</strong>m from damage or loss of data.<br />

SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss.<br />

" Please connect directly to <strong>the</strong> USB port of your TV. If you are using a separate cable connection, <strong>the</strong>re may be a USB<br />

Compatibility problem.<br />

English 25


Advanced Features<br />

" Only MP3 and JPEG file formats are supported.<br />

. The Media Play (USB) mp3 format only supports music files with a high sampling frequency (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48<br />

kHz).<br />

" We recommend <strong>the</strong> sequential jpeg format.<br />

" Do not disconnect <strong>the</strong> USB device while it is loading.<br />

" MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.<br />

" The playing duration of an mp3 file may be displayed as "00:00:00" if its playing time information is not found at <strong>the</strong><br />

start of <strong>the</strong> file.<br />

" The higher <strong>the</strong> resolution of <strong>the</strong> image, <strong>the</strong> longer it takes to display on <strong>the</strong> screen.<br />

" The Photo or Music List displays up to 300 folders or files.<br />

" Loading may take some time depending on <strong>the</strong> size of <strong>the</strong> file.<br />

" MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played.<br />

" Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports <strong>the</strong> creation of content, distribution and management<br />

of <strong>the</strong> content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including <strong>the</strong> protection of <strong>the</strong> rights and interests of <strong>the</strong><br />

content providers, <strong>the</strong> prevention of <strong>the</strong> illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements.<br />

" The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when connected to <strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

" If a USB extension cable is used, <strong>the</strong> USB device may not be recognized or <strong>the</strong> files on <strong>the</strong> device may not be read.<br />

" If a USB device connected to <strong>the</strong> TV is not recognized, <strong>the</strong> list of files on <strong>the</strong> device is corrupted or a file in <strong>the</strong> list is<br />

not played, connect <strong>the</strong> USB device to <strong>the</strong> PC, format <strong>the</strong> device and check <strong>the</strong> connection.<br />

" If a file deleted from <strong>the</strong> PC is still found when Media Play is run, use <strong>the</strong> "Empty <strong>the</strong> Recycle Bin" function on <strong>the</strong> PC<br />

to permanently delete <strong>the</strong> file.<br />

Photos<br />

Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show)<br />

1. Press <strong>the</strong> _NFO button to display <strong>the</strong> option View, Start Slide Show,<br />

Delete, Delete All, Deselect All.<br />

2. Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button to select Start Slide Show <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong><br />

ENTER I_ button.<br />

During <strong>the</strong> slide show, files are displayed in order from <strong>the</strong><br />

currently shown file.<br />

MP3 files can be automatically played during <strong>the</strong> Slide Show<br />

if <strong>the</strong> Default Background Music is set to On. To enable this<br />

function, MP3 files and o<strong>the</strong>r photo files must be located in <strong>the</strong><br />

same folder on <strong>the</strong> USB Memory Device.<br />

Press <strong>the</strong> _NFO button during <strong>the</strong> slide show to set <strong>the</strong> following options Slide Show Speed, Background Music,<br />

Background Music Setting, List. Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button to select <strong>the</strong> option, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

- After setting <strong>the</strong> option press <strong>the</strong> ENTERE_ button to make a change.<br />

Press <strong>the</strong> INFO button during <strong>the</strong> play <strong>the</strong> photo files to set <strong>the</strong> following options Start Slide Show, Zoom, Rotate,<br />

List. Press <strong>the</strong> A or T button to select <strong>the</strong> option, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button.<br />

- After setting <strong>the</strong> option press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI_ button to make a change.<br />

6 English


Music<br />

Using <strong>the</strong> MP3 List<br />

Folder icon<br />

Music list icon<br />

Move to <strong>the</strong> previous folder stage icon<br />

Press _ (nEW) or _ (FF)buttons to change pages.<br />

The selected file is displayed on <strong>the</strong> top with its playing time.<br />

1. To select all files or a file, press <strong>the</strong> _NFO button to display <strong>the</strong> Music<br />

menus.<br />

Press <strong>the</strong> ENTERI:_ button to select Play (or Play Selected File),<br />

Repeat Music, Delete (or Delete Selected File), Delete All or<br />

Deselect All.<br />

2. Press <strong>the</strong> A or • button to move to an icon, <strong>the</strong>n press <strong>the</strong><br />

ENTER E_ button.<br />

Pressing <strong>the</strong> ENTERI:_ button over a musical note icon immediately<br />

plays <strong>the</strong> music file.<br />

Pressing <strong>the</strong> ENTER_ button over a folder icon shows <strong>the</strong> music<br />

files included in <strong>the</strong> folder.<br />

III Play: Select to play MP3 files.<br />

This menu only shows files with <strong>the</strong> MP3 file extension. Files with o<strong>the</strong>r file extensions are not displayed, even if<br />

<strong>the</strong>y are saved on <strong>the</strong> same USB device.<br />

To adjust <strong>the</strong> music volume, press <strong>the</strong> --VOL+ button on <strong>the</strong> remote control. To mute <strong>the</strong> sound, press <strong>the</strong><br />

MUTE button on <strong>the</strong> remote control.<br />

Ill Repeat Music (On / Off): Select to repeatedly play MP3 files in <strong>the</strong> current folder.<br />

Playing Music<br />

• Only displays files with <strong>the</strong> MP3 file extension. O<strong>the</strong>r file extensions are not displayed, even if <strong>the</strong>y are saved on <strong>the</strong> same<br />

USB device.<br />

• If <strong>the</strong> sound is strange when playing MP3 files, adjust <strong>the</strong> Equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD in <strong>the</strong> Sound menu. (An<br />

oveFmodulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.)<br />

• Music function information icons<br />

Repeat Music is On.<br />

Repeat Music is Off.<br />

_ When pressing <strong>the</strong> Fcq (Play)/ _T1 (Pause) button on <strong>the</strong> remote control while music is playing.<br />

When press ng <strong>the</strong> _q (Stop) button on <strong>the</strong> remote control, <strong>the</strong> music stops.<br />

English 27


Advanced Features<br />

Setup ...........................................................................................................................................................................<br />

Using <strong>the</strong> Setup Menu<br />

Slide Show Speed: Select to control <strong>the</strong> slide show speed. You can<br />

select Fast, Normal or Slow.<br />

m Background Music: Select to determine whe<strong>the</strong>r to play an MP3 file<br />

during a slide show. You can select Music On or Music Off.<br />

m Background Music Setting: While a slide show is in progress, use<br />

<strong>the</strong> Background Music Setting to select a music file to listen to.<br />

Select an MP3 file as <strong>the</strong> background music.<br />

m<br />

Repeat Music: Select to determine whe<strong>the</strong>r to repeat playing <strong>the</strong><br />

music when all MP3 files in <strong>the</strong> current folder have been played.<br />

m Screen Saver: Select to set <strong>the</strong> waiting time before <strong>the</strong> screen saver appears. The screensaver will appear when no<br />

button is pressed for 4 hours, 8 hours and 10 hours.<br />

Ill Safe Remove: You can remove <strong>the</strong> device safely from <strong>the</strong> TV<br />

Playing <strong>the</strong> selected photos / music files<br />

• Press <strong>the</strong>Yellow button.<br />

• Repeat <strong>the</strong> above operation to select desired photos / music files.<br />

Selected photos or files are marked with <strong>the</strong> symbol ,,/. To cancel a selection, press <strong>the</strong> Yellow button again.<br />

• Press <strong>the</strong> FCq (Play)/ ENTERI_ button to play <strong>the</strong> selected photos or files.<br />

8 English


O<strong>the</strong>r Information<br />

Attaching <strong>the</strong> Blanking Bracket<br />

When installing <strong>the</strong> TV onto a wall, attach <strong>the</strong> Blanking Bracket as shown. .. o_oo_ooo<br />

Installing <strong>the</strong> Wall Mount Kit<br />

The wall mount kit (sold separately) allows you to mount <strong>the</strong> TV on <strong>the</strong> wall.<br />

For detailed information on installing <strong>the</strong> wall mount, see <strong>the</strong> instructions provided with <strong>the</strong> wall mount. Contact a technician for<br />

assistance when installing <strong>the</strong> wall mount bracket. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any damage to <strong>the</strong> product or<br />

injury to yourself or o<strong>the</strong>rs if you elect to install <strong>the</strong> TV on your own.<br />

Wail Mount Kit Specifications (VESA)<br />

The wall mount kit is not supplied, but sold separately.<br />

Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to <strong>the</strong> floor. When attaching to o<strong>the</strong>r building materials, please contact<br />

your nearest dealer. If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury.<br />

NOTE<br />

* Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are shown in <strong>the</strong> table below.<br />

* When purchasing our wall mount kit, a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provided.<br />

* Do not use screws that do not comply with <strong>the</strong> VESA standard screw specifications.<br />

* Do not use screws that are longer than <strong>the</strong> standard dimension or do not comply with <strong>the</strong> VESA standard screw<br />

specifications. Screws that are too long may cause damage to <strong>the</strong> inside of <strong>the</strong> TV set.<br />

* For wall mounts that do not comply with <strong>the</strong> VESA standard screw specifications, <strong>the</strong> length of <strong>the</strong> screws may differ<br />

depending on <strong>the</strong> wall mount specifications.<br />

* Do not fasten <strong>the</strong> screws too strongly; this may damage <strong>the</strong> product or cause <strong>the</strong> product to fall, leading to personal<br />

injury. Samsung is not liable for <strong>the</strong>se kinds of accidents.<br />

* Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA or non-specified wall mount is used or<br />

<strong>the</strong> consumer fails to follow <strong>the</strong> product installation instructions.<br />

* Do not mount <strong>the</strong> TV at more than a 15 degree tilt.<br />

* Always use two people to mount <strong>the</strong> TV to a wall.<br />

English 29


O<strong>the</strong>r Information<br />

ii_i_i _{@i_{_ _i ____ ____ __}_{_ ___i!{i _!}_ i_ {{{ @<br />

LCD-TV<br />

19-22<br />

75 X 75<br />

100X 100<br />

23-29 200 X 100<br />

30-40 200 X 200<br />

46-55 400 X 400<br />

57-65 600 X 400<br />

70-80 800 X 400<br />

80- 1400 X 800<br />

//_ Do electric not install shock. your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on, It may result in personal injury due to<br />

The Kensington Lock is not supplied by Samsung. It is a device used to<br />

physically fix <strong>the</strong> system when using it in a public place. The appearance and<br />

locking method may differ from <strong>the</strong> illustration depending on <strong>the</strong> manufacturer.<br />

Refer to <strong>the</strong> manual provided with <strong>the</strong> Kensington Lock for additional<br />

information on proper use.<br />

Please find a "_" icon on <strong>the</strong> rear of <strong>the</strong> TV. A Kensington slot is beside<br />

<strong>the</strong> "_" icon,<br />

To lock <strong>the</strong> product, follow <strong>the</strong>se steps:<br />

1. Wrap <strong>the</strong> Kensington lock cable around a large, stationary object such as<br />

desk or chair.<br />

2. Slide <strong>the</strong> end of <strong>the</strong> cable with <strong>the</strong> lock attached through <strong>the</strong> looped end<br />

of <strong>the</strong> Kensington lock cable.<br />

3. Insert <strong>the</strong> locking device into <strong>the</strong> Kensington slot on <strong>the</strong> product O.<br />

4. Lock <strong>the</strong> lock.<br />

These are general instructions, For exact instructions, see <strong>the</strong> User manual supplied with <strong>the</strong> locking device.<br />

The locking device has to be purchased separately.<br />

The location of <strong>the</strong> Kensington slot may be different depending on <strong>the</strong> TV model.<br />

0 English<br />

M4<br />

M6<br />

M8<br />


Caution: Pulling, pushing, orclimbing on<strong>the</strong>TVmaycause <strong>the</strong>TVtofall.Inparticular, ensure yourchildren<br />

donothangover ordestabilize <strong>the</strong>TV.Doing somaycause <strong>the</strong>TVtotipover, causing serious injuries or<br />

death. Followallsafety precautions provided in<strong>the</strong>included Safety Flyer withyourTV,Foradded stability<br />

andsafety, youcanpurchase andinstall <strong>the</strong>anti falldevice asdescribed below,<br />

The TV-Holder Kit (Sold Separately):<br />

The parts below are included in <strong>the</strong> TV Holder kit. In addition, you need to provide a wood screw, screw and molly, or o<strong>the</strong>r screw<br />

appropriate for <strong>the</strong> wall or cabinet you intend to secure <strong>the</strong> Td-Holder string to. We recommend a size M4xL20 wood screw.<br />

Installing <strong>the</strong> rV-Holder<br />

1. Remove <strong>the</strong> screw attached to <strong>the</strong> back of your TV, and <strong>the</strong>n connect <strong>the</strong> TV-Holder to <strong>the</strong> TV with <strong>the</strong> screw included in<br />

<strong>the</strong> TV-Holder Kit that is designated for your T_.<br />

2.<br />

8,<br />

Make sure to use only <strong>the</strong> appropriate supplied screw. If you use a different screw, you can damage your TV.<br />

Firmly fasten <strong>the</strong> screw you provided (size M4xL20 or similar) to <strong>the</strong> wall or cabinet where <strong>the</strong> TV is to be installed.<br />

If you fasten <strong>the</strong> screw to <strong>the</strong> wall, we recommend you drive <strong>the</strong> screw into a stud. If that is not possible, use a<br />

molly to anchor <strong>the</strong> screw.<br />

Tie <strong>the</strong> TV-Holder cord to <strong>the</strong> screw fastened on <strong>the</strong> wall or cabinet so that <strong>the</strong> TV is fixed. See <strong>the</strong> illustrations below.<br />

Install <strong>the</strong> TV close to <strong>the</strong> wall so that it does not fall.<br />

When attaching <strong>the</strong> TV-Holder cord to <strong>the</strong> wall, tie <strong>the</strong> cord level with <strong>the</strong> ground or slanted downwards for safety<br />

purposes,<br />

Check <strong>the</strong> cord occasionally to make sure it is secure.<br />

Before moving <strong>the</strong> TV, separate <strong>the</strong> connected cord first.<br />

4. Verify all connections are properly secured, Periodically check <strong>the</strong> connections for any sign of fatigue or failure. If you have<br />

any doubt about <strong>the</strong> security of your connections, contact a professional installer.<br />

To purchase <strong>the</strong> rV-Holder Kit, contact Samsung Customer Care<br />

- In <strong>the</strong> United States: 1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864)<br />

- In Canada: 1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864)<br />

English 31


O<strong>the</strong>r Information<br />

if <strong>the</strong> TV seems to have a problem, first try this list of possible problems and solutions, if none of <strong>the</strong>se troubleshooting tips<br />

apply, visit "www.samsung.com," <strong>the</strong>n click on Support, or call Samsung customer service at 1-800-SAMSUNG.<br />

poor picture Eirstof all, please perform <strong>the</strong> Picture Test and confirm that your W is properly displaying <strong>the</strong> test image,<br />

(goto MENU _Support _Self Diagnosis 7Picture Test)(p. 24)<br />

If<strong>the</strong> test image is properly displayed, <strong>the</strong> poor picture may be caused by <strong>the</strong> source or signal.<br />

The TV imagedoes not look as good as it • Ifyou have an analog cable/satellite box, upgrade to an HD digital set top box. Use HDMI or<br />

did in <strong>the</strong> store. Component cables to deliver HD (highdefinition) picture quality.<br />

• Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD stations from <strong>the</strong> channel line up.<br />

• Antenna connection: TryHD stations after performing Auto program.<br />

Many HD channels are up scaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents.<br />

• Adjust tile Cable/Sat box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.<br />

The picture is distorted: macro block error, • Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially in fast moving pictures such<br />

small block, dots, pixelization, as sports and action movies.<br />

• Low signal levelcan cause picture distortion. Ttqis isnot aW problem.<br />

• Mobile phones used close to <strong>the</strong> TV (cca up to lm) may cause noise in picture on analog and digital<br />

T_<br />

Color is wrong or missing. • Ifyou're using Component connection, make sure tlqecomponent cables are connected to <strong>the</strong><br />

correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause color problems or a blank screen.<br />

There is poor color or brightness. • Adjust <strong>the</strong> Picture options in <strong>the</strong> TV menu. (go to Picture mode / Color / Brightness / Sharpness)<br />

(p. 16)<br />

• Adiust Energy Saving option in <strong>the</strong> Setup menu. (p. 16)<br />

• Try resetting tlqepicture to view <strong>the</strong> default picture settings. (go to MENU - Picture - Picture Reset)<br />

(p. 18)<br />

Ttlere is adotted lineon <strong>the</strong> edge of <strong>the</strong> • If<strong>the</strong> picture size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9 (p. 17).<br />

screen. • Change cable/satellite box resolution.<br />

Ttle picture is black and white. • Ifyou are using an AV composite input, connect <strong>the</strong> video cable (yellow)to <strong>the</strong> Green jack of<br />

component input 1on <strong>the</strong> TM<br />

Wtlen cllanging channels, tile picture • Ifconnected to a cable box, please try to reset it. (reconnect <strong>the</strong> AC cord and wait until <strong>the</strong> cable box<br />

freezes or is distorted or delayed, reboots. It maytake up to 20 minutes)<br />

• Set <strong>the</strong> output resolution of <strong>the</strong> cable box to 1080i or 72%.<br />

Sound Rroblem Eirstof all, please perform <strong>the</strong> Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly operating.<br />

(goto MENU- Suppor_- Self Diagnosis : Sound Test)(p. 24)<br />

If<strong>the</strong> audio is OK,<strong>the</strong> sound problem may caused by <strong>the</strong> source or signal.<br />

There is no sound or <strong>the</strong> sound istoo low • Pleasecheck <strong>the</strong> volume of <strong>the</strong> device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to your T_<br />

at maximum volume.<br />

Ttqepicture is good but <strong>the</strong>re is no sound. • Set <strong>the</strong> Speaker Select option to TV Speaker in tlqe Sound menu (p. 20).<br />

• Ifyou are using an external device, make sure <strong>the</strong> audio cables are connected to <strong>the</strong> correct audio<br />

input jacks on <strong>the</strong> T_<br />

• Ifyou are using an external device, check <strong>the</strong> device's audio output option (ex. you may need to<br />

change your cable box's audio option to HDMIwhen you have a HDMI connected to your TV).<br />

• Ifyou are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable isrequired.<br />

• Ifyour W has a headphone jack, make sure <strong>the</strong>re is nothing plugged into it.<br />

• Reboot <strong>the</strong> connected device by reconnecting <strong>the</strong> device's power cable.<br />

Ttqespeakers are making an inappropriate • Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input.<br />

noise. • For antenna or Cable connections, check <strong>the</strong> signal strength. Low signallevel maycause sound<br />

distorfion.<br />

2 English<br />

• Perform tlqeSound Test as explained above.


iii iiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii<br />

No Picture, No Video<br />

The TVwon't turn on. • Make sure <strong>the</strong> AC power cord is securely plugged in to <strong>the</strong> wall outlet and <strong>the</strong> T_<br />

• Make sure <strong>the</strong> wall outlet is working.<br />

• Try pressing <strong>the</strong> POWER button on <strong>the</strong> TV to make sure <strong>the</strong> problem is not <strong>the</strong> remote. If<strong>the</strong> TV turns<br />

on, referto "Remote control does not work" below.<br />

The TVturns off automatically. • Ensure <strong>the</strong> Sleep Timer is set to Off in <strong>the</strong> Setup menu (p. 20).<br />

• Ifyour PC is connected to <strong>the</strong> T_, check your PC power settings.<br />

• Make sure <strong>the</strong> AC power cord is plugged in securelyto <strong>the</strong> wall outlet and <strong>the</strong> T_<br />

• When watching TV from an antenna or cable connection, <strong>the</strong> TVwill turn off after 10 - 15 minutes if<br />

<strong>the</strong>re is no signal.<br />

There is no picture/video. • Check cable connections (removeand reconnect al cables connected to <strong>the</strong> TVand external<br />

devices).<br />

• Set your externaldevice's (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video outputs to match <strong>the</strong> connections<br />

RF(Cable/Antenna)Connection<br />

to <strong>the</strong> TV input. For example, if an external device's output is HDMI, it should be connected to an<br />

HDMI input on <strong>the</strong> TV.<br />

• Make sure your connected devices are powered on.<br />

• Be sure to select <strong>the</strong> TV's correct source by pressing <strong>the</strong> SOURCE button on <strong>the</strong> remote control.<br />

• Reboot <strong>the</strong> connected device by reconnecting <strong>the</strong> device's power cable.<br />

The TV isnot receiving all channels. • Make sure <strong>the</strong> coaxial cane is connected securely.<br />

• Pleasetry Auto Program to add available channels to <strong>the</strong> channel 1st. Go to MENU - Channel -<br />

Auto Program <strong>the</strong>n select Auto and make sure <strong>the</strong> correct Cable TV signal type is set in <strong>the</strong> menu.<br />

There are 3 options (STD, HRC and IRC) (p. 14).<br />

• Verify <strong>the</strong>Antenna is positioned correctly.<br />

No Caption on digital channels. • Check Caption Setup menu. Try changing Caption Mode Service1 to OO1 (p. 22).<br />

• Some channels may not have caption data.<br />

The picture is distorted: macro block error, • Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especiallywith fast moving pictures<br />

smal block, dots, pixeization, such as sports and action movies.<br />

• A low signal can cause picture distortion. This is not aTV problem.<br />

PC Connection<br />

A "Mode Not Supported" message • Set your PC's output resolution so it matches <strong>the</strong> resolutions supported by <strong>the</strong> TV (p. 12).<br />

appears.<br />

"PC" isalways shown on <strong>the</strong> source list, • This is normal; "PC" is alwaysshown on <strong>the</strong> source list, regardless of whe<strong>the</strong>r a PC isconnected.<br />

even if a PC is not connected.<br />

Thevideo isOK but <strong>the</strong>re is no audio. • Ifyou are using an HDMI connection, check <strong>the</strong> audio output setting on your PC.<br />

O<strong>the</strong>rs<br />

Purple/green rolling horizontal bars and • Remove<strong>the</strong> left and right audio connections from <strong>the</strong> set-top-box. If<strong>the</strong> buzzing stops, this indicates<br />

buzzing noise from <strong>the</strong> TV speakers with that <strong>the</strong> set-top-box has a grounding issue. Replace <strong>the</strong> Component video cables with an HDMI<br />

Component cable connection, connection.<br />

The picture won't display infull screen. • HD channels will have black bars on ei<strong>the</strong>r side of <strong>the</strong> screen when displaying up scaled SD (4:3)<br />

contents.<br />

• Black bars on <strong>the</strong> Top & Bottom will be shown on movies that have aspect ratios different from your<br />

TV.<br />

• Adjust <strong>the</strong> picture size options on your external device or TV to full screen.<br />

The remote control does not work. • Replace <strong>the</strong> remote control batteries with <strong>the</strong> poles (+/-) in<strong>the</strong> right direction.<br />

• Clean <strong>the</strong> sensor's transmission window on <strong>the</strong> remote.<br />

• Try pointing <strong>the</strong> remote directly at <strong>the</strong> TV from 5--6 feet away.<br />

The cable/set top box remote control • Program <strong>the</strong> Cable/Set remote control to operate <strong>the</strong> T_ Refer to <strong>the</strong> Cable/Set user manual for <strong>the</strong><br />

doesn't turn <strong>the</strong> TV on or off, or adjust <strong>the</strong> SAMSUNG TV code.<br />

volume.<br />

English 33


O<strong>the</strong>r Information<br />

A "Mode Not Supported" message • Check <strong>the</strong> supported resolution of <strong>the</strong> T_,and adjust <strong>the</strong> external device's output resolution<br />

appears, accordingly. Refer to <strong>the</strong> resolution settings on page 12 of this manual.<br />

Caption on TV menu isgreyed out. • Caption can not be sebcted in <strong>the</strong> TV menu when connected via HDMIor Component (p. 22).<br />

• Caption must be activated on <strong>the</strong> external device (p. 22).<br />

There is a plastic smell from <strong>the</strong> T_ • This smell is normal and will dissipate over time.<br />

The TV Signal Strength isunavailable in • This function is only availablewith digital channels from an Antenna / RF / Coax connection (p. 24).<br />

<strong>the</strong> Self Diagnostic Test menu.<br />

The TV istilted to <strong>the</strong> side. • Remove<strong>the</strong> base stand from <strong>the</strong> TV and reassemble it.<br />

The channel menu is greyed out • The Channel menu is only availablewhen <strong>the</strong> TV source is selected.<br />

(unavailable).<br />

Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or • If<strong>the</strong> TV is in <strong>the</strong> Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Change<br />

every time <strong>the</strong> TV is turned off. <strong>the</strong> settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in<strong>the</strong> Plug & Play procedure. Press<strong>the</strong><br />

You have intermittent loss of audio or • Check <strong>the</strong> cable connections and reconnect <strong>the</strong>m.<br />

SOURCE button to select "IV mode, and go to MENU -_ Setup -_ Plug & Play -_ ENTER_ (p. 8).<br />

video. • Loss of audio orvideo can be caused by usingoverly rigid or thick cables. Make sure <strong>the</strong> cables are<br />

flexible enough for long term use. Ifmounting <strong>the</strong> TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90<br />

degree connectors.<br />

You see small particles when you look • This is part of <strong>the</strong> product's design and is not a defect.<br />

closely at <strong>the</strong> edge of <strong>the</strong> frame of <strong>the</strong> T_<br />

POP OV's internal banner ad) appears on • Select Home Use under Plug & Play mode. For details, referto Plug & Play Feature (p. 8).<br />

<strong>the</strong> screen.<br />

This TFT LCD panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However,<br />

<strong>the</strong>re may be a few bright or dark pixels on <strong>the</strong> screen. These pixels will have no impact on <strong>the</strong> performance of <strong>the</strong><br />

product.<br />

! Storage and Maintenance<br />

4 English


SrS_ TruSurround HD,SRSand_ symbol aretrademarks ofSRSLabs, Inc.<br />

TruSurroundHD TruSurround HD technology is incorporatedunder license from SRS Labs, Inc,<br />

[_ DOLBY<br />

D|BITAL ]<br />

Open Source License Notice<br />

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and <strong>the</strong> double-D symbol are<br />

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.<br />

In <strong>the</strong> case of using open source software, Open Source Licenses are available on <strong>the</strong> product menu.<br />

Open Source License Notice is written only English.<br />

Display Resolution 1920 x 1080<br />

EnvironmentalConsiderations<br />

Operating Temperature 50°F to 104°F (10°C to 40°C)<br />

Operating Humidity 10% to 80%, non-condensing<br />

Storage Temperature -4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C)<br />

Storage Humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing<br />

Stand Swivel(Left / Right) -20°- 20°<br />

Screen Size 40 inches<br />

(Diagonal) (40.0 inches measured diagonally)<br />

Sound<br />

10WX2<br />

38.2 X 3.1 X 23.3 inches<br />

(970.0 X 78.6 X 591.3 mm)<br />

Withstand 38.2 X 9.5 X 25.7 inches<br />

(970.0 X 240.0 X 653.0 mm)<br />

Weight<br />

Without Stand 32.0 Ibs (14.5 kg)<br />

With Stand 38.4 Ibs (17.4 kg)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.<br />

This device is a Class B digital apparatus.<br />

For information about power supply, and more about power consumption, refer to <strong>the</strong> label attached to <strong>the</strong> product.<br />

English 35


O<strong>the</strong>r Information<br />

m Front view / Side view<br />

m Jack panel detail / Rear view<br />

° T1 l)<br />

I*_ e I<br />

1<br />

® ® _ @ ®® [_] ..............................<br />

_.=.._ @_<br />

I--o--I<br />

(Unit: inches)<br />

(Unit: inches)<br />

NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale. Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice. Refer to <strong>the</strong><br />

dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV. Not responsible for typographical or printed errors.<br />

@ 2010 Samsung Electronics America, Inc<br />

6 English


A F R<br />

Antenna 14 FAV_CHbutton 7, 14 Remote Control 7<br />

AUDIO OUT 11 Film Mode 18 Repeat Music 27<br />

Auto Adjustment 18 Fine Tune 16 Rotate 26<br />

Auto Volume 19 Flesh Tone 17<br />

Frequency 12 S<br />

B Select All 15<br />

................................................................................................................................................................................<br />

H<br />

Background Music 28 .................................................................................................................................................................<br />

Self Diagnosis 24<br />

Balance L/R 19 HDMI 9 Sharpness 16<br />

Batteries 7 Home Theater 11 Signal Strength 24<br />

Black Tone 17 Sleep Timer 20<br />

Blanking Bracket 29 I Slide Show 25<br />

Brightness 16 Software Upgrade 24<br />

Installation Space 2<br />

Source List 13<br />

Speaker Select 20<br />

C L Specifications 35<br />

Change PIN 22<br />

Channel Menu 14 Language 22 Standby mode 6<br />

License 35 Symbol 3<br />

Clock 20<br />

Color Tone 17<br />

Component 10<br />

Connecting to a PC 12 Media Play 25 Timer 20<br />

Connecting to an Audio Device 11 Melody 23 Tools 3<br />

Memorizing Channels 14 Troubleshooting 32<br />

D Mono 19 TV Speaker 20<br />

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 11<br />

Music 27<br />

D-sub 12 U<br />

Dynamic 16 N USB Drive 25<br />

Dynamic Contrast 17 Navigate 13<br />

E<br />

Edit Name 13<br />

Editing Channels 15<br />

Energy Saving 23<br />

Equalizer 19<br />

External Speaker 20<br />

M<br />

O<br />

ON/OFF button 7<br />

Optimal resolution 12<br />

P<br />

Photos 26<br />

Picture Size 17<br />

Plug & Play 8<br />

Power Indicator 6<br />

T<br />

V<br />

Volume<br />

W<br />

Wall Mount 29<br />

Warm 17<br />

White Balance 17<br />

English 37


Lasfigurasy las ilustracionesde esteManualdel usuariose propordonancomo referendasolamentey puedenset diferentesdel aspecto<br />

realdel producto.Eldise_oy las especifbadones del productoestan sujetosa cambios sin previo avbo.<br />

'(_ Paraobtenermasinformad6nsobrelosterminosde h garantia,consulteh tarjetade garantia.<br />

LaspantalhsLCDconformatode pantallapanoramica(16:9,h relaci6nde aspectoancho:altode lapantalla)estandise_adasprincipalmenteparavisualizarvideosde<br />

movimbntodeformatopanoramico.Lasimagenes@benestarprincipalmentenel formatopanoramicoderelaci6n16:9,o ampliadaspara bnar lapantallasid modelo<br />

tbne estaopci6ny lasimagenesestanenmovimbntoconstante.Lavisualizaci6nde imagenesy graficosestatbosen lapantalla,comehs barrasoscurashterabs en<br />

programaci6ny videosdetelevisi6nen formatoestandarno ampliados,debelimitarseano masdd 5% deltbmpo totaldevbualizaci6ndd televisorpor semana.<br />

Asimismo,lavisualizaci6ndeotrasimagenesestaticasy de texto,comoinformesbursatibs,pantallasde videojuegos, Iogotiposcomerciabs,sitiosweb o graficosy patrones<br />

de ordenador,sedebelimitarentodos lostelevisoresaltbmpo especificadomasarriba.Lavisualizaci6ndeimagenesestaticasquesupereloslimitesdelasinstrucciones<br />

anteriorespuedeproducirunenvejecimbntodesigualde laspantalhsLCD,Io que provocarauna reproducci6nsuperpuestasutilpero permanentede laimagendela LCD.<br />

Paraevitarlo,varielaprogramaci6ny lasimagenesy, sobretodo,visualiceimagenesen movimbntoatoda pantalla,no graficosestatbosnibarrasoscuras.Enmodelosde<br />

LODque ofrezcanopcionesparaeltama_iode laimagen,utiliceestoscontrobsparaver losdistintosformatoscomoimagenatoda pantalla.<br />

Tengacuidadoen lasebcci6ny duraci6ndelosformatosdetebvbi6n utilizadospara lavbualizaci6n.UnevenLODagingasa resultd formatselectionand use,aswellas<br />

burnedinimages,arenotcoveredbyyourSamsunglimitedwarranty.<br />

o DOOUMENTODEGARANTiALIMITADAPAPANORTEAMERIOADESAMSUNGELECTRONICS<br />

De acuerdocon losrequisitos,condidones,exdusionesy limitacionesde la Garantialimitadaoriginalsuministradacon los productosde SamsungElectronics<br />

(SAMSUNG),as[ como los requisitos,condidones,exdusionesy limitacionesinduidos en elpresentedocumento,SAMSUNGproporcionaraadidonalmente<br />

un serviciode reparaciOnde garantiaen EE.UU.para los productosde SAMSUNGadquiridosenCanada,yen Canadarespecto a los productosde<br />

SAMSUNGadquiridos en EE.UU.,para el periodo de garantiaespecificadooriginalmente,y s61opara elcomprador original.<br />

Las reparadonesen garantiadescritasanteriormentedeben realizarseen centrosde serviciot@nico autorizadosde SAMSUNG.Junto con estedocumento,<br />

se debepresentarun documentode garantia limitadaoriginaly una facturacon fecha como prueba decompra en elcentro de se_viciot@nico. Eltransporte<br />

a y desde elcentro de serviciot@nico esresponsabilidaddel comprador.Lascondidones cubbrtas se limitansolamentea defectosde fabricadOnen<br />

materialy mano de obra, y s61olos que se hayanproducidocon un uso normaldel producto.<br />

Exduidas,pero no limitadasa elias,se encuentranlas disposidones originabsespecificadaspara los servbiosa domidlio o enlas instaladonesde la<br />

empresa,tbmpos m_imos y minimosde reparaci6n,cambioso sustituciones,accesorios,opdones, actualizacionesoconsumibbs.<br />

Para conocerla ubicadOnde un centrode serviciot@nico autodzadode SAMSUNG,Ilameal nOmerogratuitoindicado:<br />

- In <strong>the</strong> UnitedStates : 1-800-SAMSUNG(1-800-726-7864)<br />

- In Canada : 1-800-SAMSUNG<br />

Evitemostrarenla pantallaimagenesfijas(comoarchivosde imagenesjpeg)oebmentoscon imagenesfijas(comeIogotiposdelos programasdetebvisi6nocon formato<br />

de imagen4:3,barrasde cotizacionesode notbiasenh parteinferiorde la pantalla,etc).Unavisual_zaci6n continuadade unaimagenfijapuedecrearimagenesfantasmas<br />

enla pantallaLOD,Ioc ]e afectaraa lacalidaddela imagen.Parareduciresterbsgo, sigaestasrecomendaciones:<br />

o Evitemostrarel mismocanaldetebvbi6n durantelargosperiodosdetbmpo.<br />

o Intenteversbmprelasimagenesenpantalhcompbta.<br />

o La reducci6ndelbrilloy dd contrasteayudaa prevenirlaaparici6ndela retenci6nde imagenes.<br />

o Utilicetodaslasfuncionesdd televisordise_iadasparareducirlaretenci6ndeimagenesy eldesgastedela pantalla;consulteelapartadocorrespondientedelmanual<br />

del usuarioparaobtenermasinformaci6n.<br />

Mantengaladistanciarequeridaentreelproductoy otrosobjetos(porejemplo,pare@s)paraasegurarh ventilaci6nadecuada.<br />

Encasecontrario,sepodriaproducirunincendioperun incrementode latemperaturaintemadel producto.<br />

'(_bs Ouando_ilice unsoporteo unmontajemural,uses61olaspiezasproporcionadaspor SamsungElectronics.<br />

" Siutilizapbzas proporcionadasperotrosfabrbantes,podriatenetprobbmascon elproductoo @tese podriacaercon elrbsgo de causarbsionespersonabs.<br />

'(_bs ElaspectopuedevariarsegOnelproducto.<br />

Tangacuidadoaltocareltelevisorporquealgunaspartespuedenestarcalbntes.<br />

4 pulgadas,_<br />

Espa_ol<br />

"[ 4 pulgadas<br />

I I<br />

_4 pulgadas<br />

,, [ 4 pulgadas<br />

]_4_P_Lga_dfs ......


©ontenido<br />

• Listado de caracteristicas ......................................... 4<br />

• Accesorios ................................................................ 4<br />

• Instale elsoporte ....................................................... 5<br />

• Aspecto general del panel de control ........................ 6<br />

• Aspecto general del mando a distancia ..................... 7<br />

• Conexi6n de una antena ........................................... 8<br />

• Plug & Play (configuraci6n inicial)............................... 8<br />

• Conexi6n a un dispositivo AV.................................... 9<br />

• Conexi6n a un dispositivo de audio ......................... 11<br />

• Conexi6n a un PC ................................................... 12<br />

• Cambio de la fuente de entrada .............................. 13<br />

• C6mo desplazarse pot los men0s ........................... 13<br />

• Men0 de canales .................................................... 14<br />

Visualizaci0nde canales 14<br />

Uso de los canales favorites 14<br />

Memorizaci6n de canales 14<br />

Edici0n de canales 15<br />

Otras funciones 15<br />

• Men0 de la imagen ................................................. 16<br />

Oambio del modo de imagen preseleccionado 16<br />

Ajuste de la configuraci6n de la imagen 16<br />

Oambio de las opciones de la imagen 16<br />

Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador 18<br />

• Men0 del sonido ..................................................... 19<br />

Oambio del modo de sonido preseleccionado 19<br />

Ajuste de la configuraci6n del sonido 19<br />

Oonfiguraci6n del sonido 19<br />

iCompruebe este s!mbo!o!<br />

• Men0 de configuraci6n ........................................... 20<br />

Configuraci6n de la hera 20<br />

Use del temporizador de desconexi6n 20<br />

Activaci6n y desactivaci6n del temporizador 20<br />

Programas de bloqueo 21<br />

Otras funciones 22<br />

Soluciones econ6micas 23<br />

• Men0 de asistenciatecnica ..................................... 24<br />

• Media Play .............................................................. 25<br />

Conexi6n de un dispositivo USB 25<br />

Uso del men0 Media Play 25<br />

• Instalaci6n del montaje mural .................................. 29<br />

• Bloqueo antirrobo Kensington ................................. 30<br />

• Fijaci6n del televisor a la pared ................................ 31<br />

• Soluci6n de problemas ........................................... 32<br />

Almacenamiento y mantenimiento 34<br />

• Licencia .................................................................. 35<br />

• Especificaciones ..................................................... 35<br />

• Dimensiones ........................................................... 36<br />

• [ndice ...................................................................... 37<br />

Nota<br />

Estafunci6nsepuedeutilizarpulsandoel Indicainformaci6nadicional.<br />

bot6nTOOLSdelmandoa distancia.<br />

®<br />

Guia paso a paso<br />

Consulte aqui las instrucciones para abrir el<br />

submen0 pertinente en la OSD (on screen<br />

display).<br />

Espaflol 3


IntroductiOn<br />

• Excelenteinterfazdigitaly capacidad de trabajoen red: ElsintonizadordigitalHD incorporado permitever las emisionesHD que no<br />

exigenuna suscripcionsin que sea necesariodisponer de un receptor de televisionpor cabldsatelite (decodificador),<br />

• Media Play: Permitereproduciralgunosarchivos de musicae imageriesguardadosen un dispositivoUSB(pag. 25).<br />

• Autodiagnostico: Permitecomprobarsi laimageny el sonidofuncionannormalmente(pag, 24).<br />

Aseguresede que los siguienteselementosse incluyencon eltelevisor de pantallaLOD.Si faltaalguno, pongase en contacto con su<br />

distribuidor.<br />

Elcolor y la forma de los componentes puedenvariar segon los modelos,<br />

Cables de entrada (se venden per separado)<br />

Espaflol


Oonsulte laguiapara instalar elsoporte.<br />

Siga lospasos queseindban acontinuacion paraconectar eltebvbor alsoporte.<br />

Tornillos (M4 xL12) ........ 1_ ................. ,<br />

T_ Vbta superior<br />

(M4xL12)<br />

Sopo d ..... ago a I ..............................<br />

I<br />

__f}7___ Partefrontal<br />

Soporte-- ;-_i ........ : ,<br />

1. Conecte elsoporte de laguia conel soporte mediantelos cuatrotornillos(M4 x LI 2),tal como semuestra.<br />

-- - Tornillos(M4x L12)<br />

2. Con el televisorbvantado,conectelo al soporte,tal como se 3. Atomilb los dos tomibs (M4x L12)en laposicion @ y los<br />

muestra, otrosdos tomillos (M4 x LI 2) en la posicionO<br />

NOTA<br />

" Para realizarel montajedebe tener en cuenta cual es la parte frontaly cual la posteriordel soporte y el soporte de la guia.<br />

. Aseguresede que al menos dos personasbvanten y muevanel televisor.<br />

" Levanteel producto y apriete los tornillos. Siaprieta los tornillos sin bvantar el TV LCD, estese puede indinar hacia un lado.<br />

Espaflol 5


IntroductiOn<br />

Elcolor y la forma del producto puedenvariar segun el modelo,<br />

Altavoces<br />

Sensordelmando a distan:_a<br />

SOURCEE_<br />

MENU<br />

-VOL+<br />

VCHA<br />

"alcaaor de encenalac<br />

(b (Encendido) Enciendeo apagael televisor.<br />

Modo de espera<br />

Sensordelmandoadistancia Indicador deencendido<br />

° SOURCE_ MENU -VOk+ v CH A ,<br />

Elmandoa distanciadebe dirigirsehaciaestepunto del televisor.<br />

Cambiaentre todas las fuentesde entradadisponibles,Enel menuen pantalla,utiliceeste<br />

bot6ncomo Io hariacon el bot6n ENTERI_ del mandoa distancia,<br />

Muestraun menuen pantalla,la OSD(visualizaci6nen pantalla),de las funcionesdelTV,<br />

Ajustarel volumen,Enla OSD, utilicelos botones- VOL ÷ de igualmodo que los botones<br />

4 y I_ del mandoa distancia.<br />

Cambianlos canales,En laOSD, utilicelos botones V CH A de igualmodo que los botones<br />

T y Adel mandoa distancia.<br />

Parpadeay seapaga cuandose enciendeelaparatoy se iluminaen el modoen espera.<br />

No dejeeltelevisoren modo de esperadurante per[odoslargos de tiempo (cuandoestede vacaciones,por ejemplo),Aunqueesteapagado<br />

continuaconsumiendouna pequeflacantidadde energia,Serecomiendadesenchufarelcable de alimentaci6n.<br />

EspaBol


Encbndey apagaeltebvisor.<br />

Pulseparaaccederdirectamentea los<br />

canabs.<br />

Pulseestebot6nparasebcdonar canabs<br />

adicionabs(digitabs)emitidospor lamisma<br />

emisora.Forexample,to selectchannel"54-<br />

3", press"54",<strong>the</strong>n press"-" and "3".<br />

Ajustael volumen.<br />

Haceque aparezcala OSD.<br />

MuestraMedia Play(USB)(pag.25).<br />

Selecdonar rapidamente las funciones que se<br />

usan con mayor frecuenda.<br />

Vuelveal menuanterior.<br />

Botonesqueseutilizanenlos menus<br />

Listade canales,Media Play(USB),etc.<br />

Instalaci6n de las pilas (tamaOode las pilas: AAA)<br />

NOTA<br />

Muestray sebccionalasfuentesdevideo<br />

disponibbs(pag.13).<br />

Vuelveal canalanterior.<br />

Cortatemporalment elsonido.<br />

Oambia los canabs.<br />

Muestrala listade canabsenlapantalla<br />

(pag.14).<br />

Muestrala listade canabsfavoritosen la<br />

pantalla(pag.14).<br />

Muestrainformad6nen lapantalladel<br />

televisor.<br />

Sebccionalosebmentosdel men0en<br />

pantallay cambialosvaloresqueaparecen<br />

en elmenu.<br />

Sab del men0.<br />

MTS:Pressto choosestereo,monoor<br />

SeparateAudioProgram(SAPbroadcast)<br />

(pag.19).<br />

RSIZE:Selects<strong>the</strong>picturesize(pag.17).<br />

CO:Controls<strong>the</strong>captiondecoder<br />

(pag.22).<br />

" Utilice el mandoa distanda a menos de 7 metros (23 pies)del<br />

tebvisor.<br />

" Una luz muy brillantepuedeafectar al funcionambnto del mando a<br />

distanda. No Io utilice cerca de lucesfluorescenteso de neon.<br />

" Elcolor y la forma puedenvariar segun el modelo.<br />

Espaflol 7


Introducci0n<br />

Cuandoel televisorseenciendepot primeravez, los parametrosbasicosse iniciande forma automatica.<br />

Conexi0ndel cable de alimentaciony laantena.<br />

ada de alimentacbn<br />

AntenaVHF/UHF<br />

o<br />

Cuandoel televisorseenclendepot primeravez, una secuenciade indlcacionesen pantallapermiteconfigurar los parametrosbasicos.Pulse<br />

el boton POWERLb. Plug & Play solo esta disponiblecuando la fuenteEntrada estaconfiguradacome TV.<br />

Paravolver al pasoanterior, pulseel botch rojo.<br />

Seleccionde un _a_oms<br />

Seieccon ae<br />

Demo comercio o<br />

Uso domiciliarJo<br />

Seleccion ae una antena<br />

SelecciOnoe un canal<br />

Configuraciondel<br />

Modo de reloj<br />

Consu]tela Guia _e<br />

conexiOnHD<br />

Pulselos Do_onesA c v a con_Lnuaaonoulse elbot6n ENTER_.<br />

Se]eccionee] aloma deseado Dara]aOSD on screendisplay).<br />

Pulselos begones,q c _ a contLnuacLonoulse elbOtChENTER_.<br />

• Seleccioneelmode Uso domiciliario. Elmode Demo comercio<br />

se utluzaen os en_ornoscomerclales.<br />

o Recuperelaconfiguraclonae la unidaddesde Demo comercio<br />

a Uso domiciiiario ',es_anaarl:Pulseel Dotonaelvolumenael<br />

televisor.Cuandoyea]a OSDdelvo]umenmantengapulsadoel<br />

bOtChMENU durante5 segunao._<br />

Pulselos begonesA c v<br />

o Auto.<br />

Disfrute delTV. Puls elDo_on=_,'_=_I_.<br />

Si desea reJniciaresta funci6n...<br />

POWER<br />

a con_LnuacLon oulse elbot6n ENTER_. PermiteseleccionaAJre,Cable<br />

Pulselos bo_onesA c v a con_LnuacLon oulse elbot6n ENTER_. Seleccionelafuentedel<br />

canaaa Jedesea memorizar.AI configurarla fuentede la antenaen Cable, se muestraun pasoque<br />

e _)erm@aslglar valoresnumenco,_ %cuencias de los canales)a los canales.Paraobtener mas<br />

nformacion consulteCanal _ Prog. Auto pag. 14).<br />

Pulseel bOtChENTERI_ en cualcJlermemento para interrumpirel proceso de memorizacion.<br />

}onfigure el Modo Reloj au_oma_lcao manuaamen_e<br />

MENUrlT1_ Configuraci6n _ Plug & Play _ ENTERI_<br />

Espaflol<br />

• Auto Permiteseleccionarelmode DST Horanoae verano/ y lazonahoraria..<br />

,_ Manual: Permiteconfigurarmanualmen_ela heray la fecha actuales(p% 20).<br />

Semuestrael mode de conexlor oaraoD_eneruna mejorca]idadde pantal]aHD.


Conexiones<br />

Use de un cable HDMi o HDMI/DVi: Conexi6n HD (hasta 1080p)<br />

Pareconseguiruna meiercalidadde imagen HD esaconsejabb utilizerla conexBn HDMI.<br />

Dispositivosdisponibles:DVD,reproductorBlu-ray, receptorper cable HD, receptorper sateliteHD STB (decodificador)<br />

...................... ;......................... \<br />

HDMI (DVl} IN / DVlAUDO IN<br />

Cabe t_D_vll a D\/l_ (no suministrado}<br />

Cable de audio (no sum_l_st_ado)<br />

* Ouando se usauna conexion de cable HDMI/DVl,se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI (DVl} _Npare video, Esposibb<br />

que un reproductor de DVD,Blu-ray, receptor per cable HD o receptor per satelite HD STBnecesite un cable DVI-HDMI(de<br />

DVla HDMI)o un adaptador DVPHDMI(de DVla HDMI),Se necesita el terminal DVlAUDIO IN pare el sonido,<br />

* La imagenquizas no se muestrecorrectamente(o no se muestreen absoluto)o el audio puede que no funcione si se<br />

conecta al televisor un dispositivoexterno que utilizauna versi6n masantigua del mode HDMI. Entales cases, consulte al<br />

fabricantede] dispositivo extemo acerca de ]aversi6n HDMI y,siesta es antigua, soliciteuna actualizaci6n.<br />

* Debe adquirir uncable certificado HDMI, De Io contrario,la imagen puede no mostrarse o producirse un error de conexion,<br />

Espaflol 9


Conexiones<br />

Use de un cable de componentes (hasta 1080p) o audio/video (solo 480i)<br />

Dispositivosdisponibles:Reproductorde DVD,Blu-ray,decodificador,receptor pot sateliteSTB,VOR<br />

Roio Blanco Amarillo<br />

Paraobtener la mejorcalidad de imagen,se recomiendala conexion de componentes antes que la conexionA/V. i<br />

Use de una conexion de cable EX-Link<br />

Dispositivosdisponibles:Dispositivosexternosque admiten Ex-Link.<br />

i'<br />

0 Espa_ol<br />

EX_L_ItK:Oonectorsolo para servicio.


Uso de una conexion de cable optico (digital)<br />

Dispositivosdisponibles:sistemade audio digital,amplificador,sistemaHome TheaterDVD<br />

,##,.............................................................................................................................................................<br />

ii! _;_; ::_: :: :_ ;;_ ,<br />

' Rojo Blanco<br />

DIGITALAUDIO OUT (OPT CAL}<br />

o<br />

o<br />

o<br />

Cable 0ptico Ino suministrado/<br />

Cuandoun sistema de audio digital seconecta al terminal DIGITALAUDIO OUT (OPT CAL}, se reduce elvolumendel<br />

televisor y del sistema.<br />

Elaudio de 5,1canales estadisponible cuando el televisor seconecta a un dispositivo extemo que admite audio de 5,1<br />

canales,<br />

Cuandoel receptor (amplificadoro sistema HomeTheater DVD)estaencendido, se puedeo[r lasalida de sonido del<br />

terminal 6ptico del televisor.Cuando el televisorrecibe una senal DTV,enviael sonido de 5,1 canales al amplificadoro<br />

sistema HomeTheater DVD.Ouando lafuente es un componente digital,como un reproductor DVD/Blu-ray/receptorde<br />

cable o satelite(decodificador),y estaconectada al televisora travesde HDMI,solo seoye el sonido de 2 canales del<br />

amplificador o delsistema HomeTheater DVD,Si deseao[r el audio de 5,I canales, conecte el terminalde lasalidade<br />

audio digitaldel reproductor DVD/Blu-ray/decodificado#receptorpor sateliteSTB directamenteal amplificador o al sistema<br />

HomeTheater,<br />

Espa, iio,


Conexiones<br />

Use de cables HDMI/DVI o D-sub<br />

Modes de visualizaciOn(entradas D-Sub y HDMI/DVI)<br />

La resolucionOptimaes 1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz.<br />

IBM<br />

MAC<br />

VESA CVT<br />

VESA DMT<br />

VESA GTF<br />

VESA DMT/DTV CEA<br />

NOTA<br />

640 x 350<br />

720 x 400<br />

640 x 480<br />

832 x 624<br />

1152 x 870<br />

720 x 576<br />

1152 x 864<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 960<br />

640 x 480<br />

640 x 480<br />

640 x 480<br />

800 x 600<br />

800 x 600<br />

800 x 600<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1152 x 864<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 800<br />

1280 x 800<br />

1280 x 960<br />

1360 x 768<br />

1440 x 900<br />

1440 x 900<br />

1680 x 1050<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1920 x 1080p<br />

31,469<br />

31,469<br />

35,000<br />

49,726<br />

68,681<br />

35,910<br />

53,783<br />

56,456<br />

75,231<br />

31,469<br />

37,861<br />

37,500<br />

37,879<br />

48,077<br />

46,875<br />

48,363<br />

56,476<br />

60,023<br />

67,500<br />

63,981<br />

79,976<br />

45,000<br />

49,702<br />

62,795<br />

60,000<br />

47,712<br />

55,935<br />

70,635<br />

65,290<br />

52,500<br />

74,620<br />

67,500<br />

70,086<br />

70,087<br />

66,667<br />

74,551<br />

75,062<br />

59,950<br />

59,959<br />

74,777<br />

74,857<br />

59,940<br />

72,809<br />

75,000<br />

60,317<br />

72,188<br />

75,000<br />

60,004<br />

70,069<br />

75,029<br />

75,000<br />

60,020<br />

75,025<br />

60,000<br />

59,810<br />

74,934<br />

60,000<br />

60,015<br />

59,887<br />

74,984<br />

59,954<br />

70,000<br />

70,000<br />

60,000<br />

" En unaconexi0n de cable HDMI/DVI,se debe utilizarel terminal HDMI (DVI}IN..<br />

" No se admite el mode entrehzado.<br />

Cable D Sub (no suminist ado/<br />

Cable de audio no suminist_ado)<br />

25,175<br />

28,322<br />

30,240<br />

57,284<br />

100,000<br />

32,750<br />

81,750<br />

95,750<br />

130,000<br />

25,175<br />

31,500<br />

31,500<br />

40,000<br />

50,000<br />

49,500<br />

65,000<br />

75,000<br />

78,750<br />

108,000<br />

108,000<br />

135,000<br />

74,250<br />

83,500<br />

106,500<br />

108,000<br />

85,500<br />

106,500<br />

136,750<br />

146,250<br />

89,040<br />

128,943<br />

148,500<br />

" Esposibleque elaparato funcione incorrectamentesi seselecciona un formate de video que no sea estandar.<br />

" Los modes Independientey Oompuestono se admiten. SOG(SyncOn Green)no se admite.<br />

2 Espaflol<br />

+/-<br />

-/+<br />

-/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

-/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

-/+<br />

_/+<br />

-/+<br />

_/+<br />

+/+


Lista de Entradas<br />

Se utilizapara sebccionarTV u otrasfuentes de<br />

entradaexternascoma reproductoresde DVD/Bluray/decodifbadoreso<br />

receptorespar sateliteSTB.<br />

(_ MENUFm _ Canal _ Lista de Entradas<br />

ENTER<br />

[] TV / AV/ Component / PC / HDMI/DVI<br />

SOURCE<br />

Puedeebgir solamentedbpositivos externos que esten<br />

conectados altebvbor. En Lista de Entradas, se<br />

resaltan las entradasconectadas.<br />

EnLista de Entradas, PC sbmpre esta activado.<br />

Funcionesbasicas<br />

O MENUbot6n: Muestrael men0principal en pantalla.<br />

O ENTERI:_ / Batondireccionabs : Muevael cursory<br />

sebccione una option. Confirmela configuration.<br />

O RETURNbaton: Vuelveal men0anterior.<br />

@ EXiTbot6n: Saledel menuen pantalh.<br />

Editar hombre<br />

(_ MENUllTI _ Entrada _ Editar Nombre _ ENTER<br />

Video / DVD / Cable STB/ Satelite STB / PVRSTB /<br />

Receptor AV/ Juego / Filmadora / PC / DVIPC / DVI/ TV /<br />

IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD/ DMA: De un nombre aldispositivo<br />

conectadoen lastomas de entrada;de esta manerasera mas<br />

facilsebccionar el dispositivode entrada.<br />

Ouando se conecta un ordenador con una resoBdon de I920<br />

x I080 a 60 Hzal HDMI (DW}IN, se debe configurar el puerto<br />

en el modo DVl PC en Editar nombre.<br />

Ouando se conecta un cable HDMI/DVlal puerto HDMI (DW)<br />

_I'._, se debe configurar el puerto en los modos DVi PC o DVl<br />

en Editar Nombre.<br />

Funcionamiento de la OSD(On Screen Display)<br />

Elprocedimientode acceso puedevariarsegL_nel men0<br />

sebccionado.<br />

MENU rm Lasopcionesdel men0 principalse<br />

,ma0en, Sonido, Cana,,<br />

Configuracidn, muestran en_apanta,a:<br />

Entrada,<br />

Aplicaciones, Soporte tecnico.<br />

• Se_ecdone un_cono con_os botones<br />

A o T.<br />

ENTERI:_ PulseENTERI:_ para accederal<br />

@ menu secundar_o<br />

A Z_' Sebcdone un menusecundadocon los<br />

botches A o T.<br />

_1 / i_ Ajusteel valorde un ebmento con<br />

se v,sua,,=ac,0o<br />

los botones elmen0 ,o_1o<br />

enpanta,,a selecclonado<br />

_,. Elajuste puede devat,at la<br />

E_/TERI:_ PulseENTER_ para confirmaruna<br />

v semecc_0n<br />

EX[T-,EJ PulseEXIT.<br />

Espanol 13


Funcionesbasicas<br />

Visualizaci6n de canales<br />

Lista de canales<br />

A_adir,borrar o establecerloscanales favoritos<br />

y usar lagala de programasde las emisiones<br />

digitales.<br />

(_ MENUiTFI-_ Canal _ Lista de canales<br />

ENTERI_<br />

Seleccioneun canalen la pantalla<br />

Todos los canales, Canales agregados,<br />

Favoritos o Grabaci6n con temporizador mediantela pulsacion<br />

de los botones A / _' y ENTERE_. A continuacionpuedever el<br />

canalseleccionado.<br />

[] _n Todos los canales: Muestratodos los canalesdisponibles<br />

actualmente,<br />

[] _ Canales agregados: Muestratodos los canalesanadidos,<br />

[] _ Favoritos: Muestratodos los canalesfavorites.<br />

[] _, Grabacion con temporizador: Muestratodos los<br />

programasactualmenteresewados.<br />

Usede los botones de colores en la Lista de canales<br />

" [f_Verde(Zoom):Aumenta o disminuyeel n0merodel<br />

canal.<br />

" ::: Amarillo(Seleccionar): Seleccionavarias listas de<br />

canales, Seleccionelos canales que desee y pulse el botch<br />

amarillopara configurar todos los canalesseleccionadosal<br />

mismo tiempo, La marca _/aparece a laizquierdade los<br />

canales seleccionados,<br />

" _-_ (Herramientas): Muestrael men0 de opciones<br />

Lista de canales, (Los men0sde las opciones pueden<br />

cambiar,dependiendo de la situacion.)<br />

Iconos de la pantalla de estado del canal<br />

_/ Canalseleccionado.<br />

V Oanalconfiguradocome favorite,<br />

(_) Programareservado,<br />

4 EspaSol<br />

Usode los canalesfavoritos<br />

(_ MENUITTI_ Canal _ Lista de canales _ ENTERI_<br />

Agregar a Favoritos / Borrar de Favoritos.........<br />

Configureloscanales queyea con masfrecuenciacome favorites,<br />

1. Seleccioneun canaly pulseel botch TOOLS,,<br />

2. Anadao borreun canal medianteelmen0Agregar a Favoritos<br />

o Borrar de Favoritos, respectivamente.<br />

Paraque aparezcantodos los canales<br />

favoritos,hagaclic en el botch que se muestra<br />

a laderecha.<br />

Memorizaci6nde canales<br />

(_ MENUrm _CanaI_ENTERI_<br />

Antena (Aire / Cable)..............................................................<br />

Antes de empezara memorizarlos canalesdisponibles,debe<br />

indicarel tipo de origende lasenalconectadaal TV (esdecir,Aire o<br />

sistema de Cable),<br />

Prog. Auto<br />

[] Aire: SeSalde antenaaerea.<br />

[] Cable: SeSalde antenadelcable,<br />

[] Auto: Antenaaereay de cable,


NOTA<br />

" AIsebcdonar el sistema de TV de cable: STD, HRC e IRC<br />

identificanlos diversos tipos de sistemasde televisionpot<br />

cable. Pongaseen contacto con su proveedorde cable<br />

para averiguarel tipo de sistema de cable exbtente en su<br />

zona. Eneste momentoya se ha sebcdonado el odgen<br />

de la seF_al.<br />

" Unavez guardados todos los canales disponibles,se<br />

inicia laeliminacion de los canabs codificados. Vuelvea<br />

mostrarse el men0 Prog. Auto.<br />

Edici6n de canales<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Canal _ Lista de canales _ ENTERI_<br />

EdbiOn de nombre de canal<br />

1. Sebcdone un canaly pulseel botch TOOLS..<br />

2. Editeel nombredelcanal medianteel men0Edbi0n de<br />

nombre de canal.<br />

[] EdbiOn de nombre de canal (s01ocanales analogicos):<br />

Asigneun hombre de canalpersonal.<br />

Otras funciones<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Canal _ ENTERI_<br />

Borrar canal encriPtado ........................................................................................................................................<br />

Esta funci0nse usapara filtrarlos canabs codifbados despuesde<br />

que la programacionautomaticahayafinalizado.Puedetardarde 20<br />

a 30 minutos.<br />

Como detener la busqueda de canales codificados<br />

1. Pulseel botch ENTERIZ_ para sebccionar Detener.<br />

2. Pulseel botch _1parasebccionar SI.<br />

3. Pulseel botch ENTERIC.<br />

Estafuncion solo esta disponibb en el modeCable.<br />

Lista de canales<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Canal _ Lista de canales _ ENTERI_<br />

Menu de opciones de Lista de canales<br />

Estabbzca cadacanal mediantelasopciones del menL]Lista de<br />

canales: (AOadir/ Borrar,Visual. tempor., Seleccionar todo /<br />

Deseleccionar todos). Losebmentos delmen0 de opciones<br />

puedenvariarsegunel estado del canal.<br />

1. Sebcdone un canaly pulseel botch TOOLS..<br />

2. Sebcdone una funciony cambie laconfiguration.<br />

[] Ahadir / Borrar : Suprima o aF/adauncanal para que se<br />

muestrenlos canabs que desee.<br />

[]<br />

[]<br />

NOTA<br />

" Todos los canabs borradosse mostraranen elmen0<br />

Todos los canales.<br />

" Un canal de color gris quieredecir que se ha<br />

suprimido.<br />

" Elmen0Ahadir solo aparececon los canabs<br />

borrados.<br />

" Suprima un canal del men0Canales agregados o<br />

Favoritos de la mismamanera.<br />

Visual. tempor.: Se puedeestabbcer queel canalque se<br />

desee se muestreautomatbamentea unahora resen/ada.Para<br />

utilizaresta funcion,en primerlugar configurelahora actual.<br />

1. Pulselos botches _ / i_ / A / T para sebccionar el<br />

canal que deseeen laLista de canabs.<br />

2. Pulseel botch TOOLSy sebccioneVisual. tempor.<br />

3. Desplacesearriba o abajo para ajustar laconfiguraci0n<br />

en lacaja o utilicelos botches numericosdel mandoa<br />

distanda para introducir lafecha y la hora.<br />

Sisebcdona Una vez, Cada semana o Cada dia en<br />

Repetir, puedeintroducir la fecha que desee.<br />

4. Sebccione Aceptar y pulseel botch ENTERI_ cuando<br />

hayaterminado.<br />

NOTA<br />

" Solo se pueden reservarlos canales memorizados.<br />

" Los programasreservadosse mostraranen el men0<br />

Grabacion con temporizador.<br />

" Cuandose ha sebccionado un canal digital, pulseel<br />

botch I_ para vet el programadigital.<br />

Seleccionar todo: Sebccione todos los canabs de laIista.<br />

Deseleccionar todos: Canceb todas las sebcciones de<br />

canabs.<br />

S01osepuede sebcdonar Deseleccionar todos si hay<br />

uno o mas canabs sebcdonados.<br />

Grabaci6n con temporizador<br />

(en Lista de canales)<br />

Puedevet,modificaro borrar un programaque hayaresen/adopara<br />

vet.La visualizacionde Grabacion con temporizador. Resalteun<br />

programay pulseel botch TOOLS para mostrar lasopciones.<br />

[] Cambiar informacion: Cambb un programaque haya<br />

resen/adopara vet.Combnce en el paso3 de "Visual.tempor."<br />

anterior.<br />

Cancelar programaciones: Canceleun programaque haya<br />

resen/adopara vet.<br />

Asi se borran los programasresaltadoso<br />

sebcdonados.<br />

Espaflol 15


Funcionesbasicas<br />

[] InformaciOn: Muestreun programaque hayareservadopara<br />

vet.Cambiense puedecambiar la informacionde reserva.)<br />

Tambionpuedevet la informacionresaltandoun<br />

programa y puBando el botch ENTERE_.<br />

[] Seleccionar todo / Deseleccionar todos: Sebccione o<br />

desebccionetodos los programasreservados.<br />

Sintonia Fina<br />

(sOlocanabs analogicos)<br />

Si lareception esclara, no tbne que realizarlasintonizadonfina<br />

del canal,yaque esta operation se hacede formaautomatica<br />

durante labosqueday la memorization. Sila sepales debiloesta<br />

distorsionada,realbe manualmentela sintonizadonfinadelcanal.<br />

Desplacesea izqubrda o derechahasta que laimagense yeaclara.<br />

Laconfiguration se aplicaal canal que se estavbndo.<br />

Loscanabs que se ban ajustadocon sintonizadon finase<br />

marcan con un asterbco "*" a laderecha del numerode canal<br />

en labanda del canal.<br />

Parareinbiar lasintonia fina, sebcdone Reiniciar.<br />

Cambio del modo de imagen preseleccionado<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Imagen _ Modo _ ENTERI_<br />

Modo<br />

Sebcdone el tipode imagenpreferido.<br />

[] Dinamico : Adecuado para un entomo iluminado.<br />

[] Normal:Adecuado para un entorno normal.<br />

[] Cine: Adecuado paravet pel[cuhs en un entorno oscuro.<br />

6 Espaflol<br />

Ajuste de la configuraciOnde la imagen<br />

Luz de fondo / Contraste / Brillo / DefiniciOn /<br />

Color/ Tinte (V/R)<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Imagen _ ENTERI_<br />

Eltelevisortienediferentesopciones de configuracionparacontrolar<br />

la calidadde la imagen.<br />

NOTA<br />

" Cuando hagacambios en Luz de fondo,Contraste,<br />

Brillo, Definicion, Color o Tinte (V/R), laOSDtambi@lse<br />

ajustar&<br />

" Enel modo PO,solo se puedenrealizarcambios en las<br />

opciones Luz de rondo, Contraste y Brillo.<br />

" La configuracionde cadadispositivo extemo conectado al<br />

tebvbor se puede ajustary guardar.<br />

Cambio de las opciones de la imagen<br />

ConfiguraciOn avanzada .......................................................<br />

(_ MENUiTR _ Imagen _ ConfiguraciOn avanzada<br />

ENTERI_<br />

(La configuracionavanzadaestadisponibleen los modos<br />

Normal / Cine)<br />

Sise comparan con los modelosanteriores,los nuevostelevisores<br />

de Samsungmuestranunaimagen masprecisa.<br />

En el modo PC, solo se puedencambiar Gamma y Balance<br />

de bianco.


[] Tono delnegro (Apagado<br />

/ Oscuro / Mas oscuro /<br />

Elmas oscuro): Sebccione el nivelde negro paraajustar la<br />

profundidadde la pantalla,<br />

[] Contraste Dinam. (Apagado / Bajo / Medic / Alto):<br />

Ajusteel contrastede lapantalla,<br />

[] Gamma: Ajuste laintensidaddel colorprimario.<br />

[] Gama de colores (Automatico / Original):Ajuste lagama de<br />

ooloresdisponiblespara crear la imagen.<br />

[] Balance de blanco: Ajustela temperaturadelcolor para<br />

obtener una imagenmasnatural,<br />

Bal. Rojo/ Bal. Verde/ Bal. Azul: Ajustela intensidadde<br />

oada color(rojo,verde,azul).<br />

Gan. Rojo / Gan.Verde / Gan.Azul: Ajusteel brillode cada<br />

color (rojo,verde,azul),<br />

Reiniciar: Restabbcelos valorespredeterminadosde<br />

Balance de blanco.<br />

[] Tono Piel: Mejoreel tone rosadode "TonePiel."<br />

[] Mejora de perfiles (Apagado / Encendido): Mejoralos<br />

bordesdel objeto,<br />

Opciones de imagen<br />

(_ MENUilTI _ Imagen _ Opciones de imagen<br />

ENTERI_<br />

Enel modo PC s01ose pueden cambiar Tono Color y<br />

TamaSo.<br />

[] Tono Color (Frio / Normal / Tibiol / Tibio2)<br />

Tibiol o Tibio2 se desactivancuando el modo de<br />

imagenes Dinamico e Normal,<br />

La configuration de cada dispesitive externocenectado<br />

a una entradadel televisorse puede ajustar y guardar.<br />

TamaSo:Esposbb que el receptorde satefite<br />

o cabletenga tambi@su propiagama de<br />

tamarios de pantalh, Sin embargo, esmuy<br />

aconsejabb utilizarel mode I6:9 la mayor[ade<br />

las veces,<br />

16:9: Ajustala imagenal mode basico(I6:9).<br />

Zoom1: Permite unaampliacionmoderada,<br />

Zoom2: Permite unaampliacionmas potente.<br />

Ajuste ancho: Ampliala relacionde aspecto de la imagenpara<br />

que se ajusteal ancho totalde lapantalla.<br />

Disponible para las seriales HD I080i/720p en el modo<br />

I6:9.<br />

4:3: Ajusta laimagenal modo basico(4:3),<br />

No yeala televisionen formate 4:3 durante largos<br />

periodos de tbmpo, Los rastrosde bordes a la<br />

izqubrda, derechao centre de lapantalla pueden<br />

provocar un desgastede la pantallaper laretenoionde<br />

la imagen que no esta cubierto per lagarant[a,<br />

Ajuste pantalla: Muestrala imagencompletasin cortes<br />

ouandola entradade laseriales HDMI(720p / 10801/I080p)<br />

o Componente(I 080i/ 1080p),<br />

NOTA<br />

" Despuesde sebcdenar Zoom1, Zoom2 o Ajuste ancho:<br />

1. PulseeI botch I_ para sebccionar Posicion.<br />

2. Pulseel botch ENTERIng.<br />

3. Pulselos botches A o T para desplazarla imagen<br />

haciaarriba o haciaabajo,<br />

4. PulseeI botch ENTERI]_.<br />

5. Pulseel botch I_ para sebcdonar Rein..<br />

6. Pulseel botch ENTERI]_ para devolvera laimagen<br />

su posicionpredeterminada.<br />

Espariol 17


Funcionesbasicas<br />

* Despuesde seleccionarAjuste pantalla en los modos<br />

HDMI (1080V1080p)o Componente (1080i/I080p),quiza<br />

deba centrar la imagen:<br />

1. Pulselos botones 4 o I_ para seleccionarPosicion.<br />

2. Pulseel boton ENTERIZ_.<br />

3. Pulselos botones A, T, _ o _, para moverla imagen.<br />

4. Pulseel boton ENTERIZ_.<br />

5. Pulselos botones 4 o _, para seleccionarRein..<br />

6. Pulseel boton ENTERIng.<br />

* HD (altadefinicion):16:9- 1080V1080p(1920x1080),720p<br />

(I280x720)<br />

* La configuraci0nde cada dispositivoexternoconectado a<br />

una entradadel televisorse puedeajustar y guardar.<br />

ATe,AV, 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2,<br />

Component(480i,480p) 4:3<br />

DTV(1080i), 16:9, 4:3,<br />

Component(1080i,1080p), Ajuste ancho,<br />

HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p) Ajuste pantalla<br />

PC 16:9, 4:3<br />

[] Digital NR (Desactivado / Bajo / Media / Alto / Auto): Si<br />

la senalde emisi0n que redbe el televisoresdebil, puede<br />

activarsela funcionDigital NR parareducir laestaticay las<br />

imagenessuperpuestasque puedenapareceren la pantalla.<br />

8 Espaflol<br />

Cuando la sepalsea debil, intenteotras opciones hasta<br />

que se vea una imagende mejorcalidad.<br />

Nivel de negro HDMI (Normal / Bajo): Seleccionael nivelde<br />

negro en la pantallapara ajustar laprofundidadde esta.<br />

Disponibles01oen el modo HDMI.<br />

Modo pelicula (Apagado /Auto): Configuraeltelevisor<br />

para detectarautomaticamentey procesarlas seSalesde las<br />

peliculasprocedentesde todas lasfuentes,y ajustala imagen<br />

para conseguiruna calidadOptima.<br />

Disponibleen TV, AV,COMPONENT(480i/1080i)y<br />

HDMI(480i/1080i).<br />

Reinicio de la imagen (Aceptar / Cance!ar) ........................<br />

Restablecelaconfiguracionpredeterminadadel modo de la imagen<br />

actual.<br />

Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador<br />

Definala fuentede entradaal PC.<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Imagen _ ENTER[_<br />

Ajuste Automa.tico .................................................................<br />

Ajusteautomaticamentelos valoresy las posicionesde lafrecuencia<br />

y afinelaconfiguration.<br />

No disponibleen las conexionesa traves del cable HDMI/DVI.<br />

Pantalla<br />

[] Grueso / Fino: Eliminao reduceel ruidode laimagen.Si el<br />

ruido no desapareces01ocon la sintonizaci0nfin& realicelos<br />

ajustesde frecuendahasta el maximo(Grueso)y vuelvaa<br />

realizarlasintonizaci0nfin& Despuesde reducirel ruido,vuelva<br />

a ajustarla imagenpara que quedealineadaen el centrode la<br />

pantalla.<br />

[] Posicion PC: Ajuste laposici0nde la pantalladel PCsi no<br />

se acoplaa la pantalladelTV. Pulselos botones A o T para<br />

ajustar laposici0nvertical. Pulselos botones _ o I_ para<br />

ajustar laposici0n horizontal.<br />

[] Reiniciar Imagen: Restablecela configuracionpredeterminada<br />

de la imagen.


Use del televisor como una pantaila de ordenador (PC)<br />

Configuraciondel softwaredel PC(basadoell WindowsXP)<br />

Segunlaversionde Windowsy latarjetade video, las pantallas<br />

realesdel PC puedenser diferentes,per(>seaplicaracasi siempre<br />

la mismainformacionde configuracionbasica.(Encase contrario,<br />

pongaseen contacto con el fabricantedel ordenadoro con el<br />

distribuidorde Samsung,)<br />

1. Hagaclic en "Panelde control" en el menode inioiode<br />

Windows.<br />

2. Hagaclioen "Apafienciay temas" en laventana "Panelde<br />

control"y apareceraun ouadrode dialogo.<br />

3. Hagaclioen "Pantalla"y apareceraunacuadrode dialogo<br />

sobre la pantalla,<br />

4. Seleccionela ficha "Configuracion"en elouadro de dialogo.<br />

• Configuracioncorrectadeltamaro (resoluoion)[Optima:I920<br />

x I080 pixeles]<br />

• Si existeunaopcion de frecuenoiaverticalen elouadrode<br />

dialogode configuration de la pantalla,el valorcorrectoes<br />

"60" o "60 Hz".Si no, hagaclic en "Aceptar" y salgadel ouadro<br />

de dialogo.<br />

Cambio del modo de sonido preseleccionado<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Sonido _ Modo _ ENTERI_<br />

Modo<br />

[] Normal: Selecdonael mode de sonido normal,<br />

[] MiJsica:Refuerzalamosioaper endma de las voces.<br />

[] Cine: Ofreceel mejorsonido para peliculas,<br />

[] Voz clara: Realzalasvoces respecto de los sonidos,<br />

[] Favorito:Aumenta la intensidaddel sonido de altafrecuencia<br />

para permitiruna mejoraudioionalas personascon problemas<br />

de audicion,<br />

Ajuste de la configuraciOndel sonido<br />

(_ MENUnTI _ Sonido -> Ecualizador -_ ENTERE_<br />

Ecualizador<br />

Es posibleajustarlos parametrosdeIsonido segun las preferencias<br />

personales.<br />

[] Modo: SeieccionaeI mode de sonidoentre los valores<br />

predefinidos,<br />

[] Balance I/D: Ajustael balanceentre los altavocesizquierdoy<br />

derecho,<br />

[] 100Hz/ 300Hz/ 1kHz / 3kHz / lOkHz (ajustede ancho de<br />

banda):Ajustael nivelde frecuenoiasespecificasde ancho de<br />

banda,<br />

[] Reiniciar: Restablecela configuraciondelecualizador,<br />

Configuraci6n del sonido<br />

(_ MENUnTI _ Sonido _ ENTERI_<br />

SRS TruSurround HD (Apagado / Encendido) ............<br />

Esta funcionproporcionauna sensaoionde sonido surround<br />

virtualde 5,1 canalesa traves de un par de altavocesmediantela<br />

tecnologiaHRTF(HeadRelatedTransferFunction),<br />

idioma preferido ....................................................................<br />

(solooanalesdigitales)<br />

Elsistema de emisionde TV digitalpermitetransmitir<br />

simultaneamentemuchaspistasde audio (per<br />

ejemplo,traduccionessimultaneasdel programaen<br />

otros idiomas),<br />

Solo sepuede seleccionaruno de los idiomas<br />

que ofrece la emisora,<br />

Sonid Mu!ti4rack (MTS)........................................................<br />

(soloanalesanalogioos)<br />

[] Mono: Elija paraoanalesqueemitenen<br />

monoauralo sitienedificultades conla<br />

reception deseralesestereo,<br />

[] Est@reo:Elijapara canalesque emiten en<br />

estereo,<br />

SAP: Elijaestaopcion para escucharel programade audio<br />

independiente,que normalmenteesuna traduccionde otro<br />

idiom&<br />

En funcion del programaconcreto que se emita, puede<br />

escuohar en mode Mono, Estereo o SAP.<br />

Vo!:Auto (Apagado / Normal)................................................<br />

Debidoa que cada estacionemisoratienesus propias condiciones<br />

de serial,el volumenpuedevariarsi cambiade canal,Esta<br />

funcion permiteajustarautomaticamenteel volumende un canal<br />

disminuyendolasalidade sonido cuando laserialde modulacion<br />

es altao aumentandolasalidade sonidoouando laserialde<br />

modulaciones baja.<br />

Esparol 19


Funcionesbasicas<br />

Seleccionar altavoz (Altavoz externo /<br />

Config. Reloj: ConfiguremanualmenteMes, Dia,Afio, Hora,<br />

Altavoz de _<br />

Minuto y am/pro.<br />

..............................................................................................................................................................<br />

S01odisponiblesi Modo Reloj esta configuradocome<br />

Debidoalas diferenciasen lavelocidadde decodificacBnentre e]<br />

Manual.<br />

altavozprincipaly el receptorde audio se puedeoriginarun eco.<br />

En talescases,establezcaTV come Aitavoz extemo.<br />

Ouando Seleccionar altavoz estaestablecido come<br />

Aitavoz extemo, los botches de volumen y MUTE no<br />

funcionany selimita laconfiguracion del sonido.<br />

Oompruebe si Seleccionar altavoz esta establecidocome<br />

Aitavoz extemo.<br />

" Altavoz de TV: Apagado, Aitavoz externo: Encendido<br />

Oompruebe si Seleccionar altavozesta establecidocome<br />

Aitavoz de TV.<br />

" Altavoz de TV: Encendido, Altavoz externo: Encendido<br />

Si no hay seflalde video, ambos altavocesse silencian,<br />

Reinicio del sonido (Aceptar / Cancelar)<br />

RestabBzcatodas las configuracionesde sonido predeterminadas<br />

de fabrica,<br />

ConfiguraciOnde la hora<br />

{_ MEHUITrl _ Configuracion _ Hora _ EI/TERI_<br />

Hora<br />

[] Reloj: La configuracBndel relojse utilizaell diferentes<br />

funoionesdel temporizadordel televisor,<br />

{_ Lahera actualaparecerasiempreque se pulseel botch<br />

IHFO,<br />

Si desconecta el cable de alimentacBn, debe oonfigurar<br />

el re]ojde nuevo.<br />

Modo Reloj (Auto / Manual)<br />

- Auto: Configurelahera automaticamentecon ]a herade un<br />

canaldigital,<br />

La antenadebe estar conectada para poder ajustar<br />

la hera automaticamente.<br />

- Manual: Establezcala hera actual manualmente,<br />

0 Espaflol<br />

Segunla emisoray laseflal, la hera automaticano se<br />

puede ajustar correctamente,Eneste case, ajuste la<br />

hera manua]mente,<br />

Puedeajustar Mes, Dia, Afio, Hora y Minuto<br />

directamente pulsandolos botches numericosdel<br />

mando a distancia,<br />

Zona Tiempo: SeBccionela zonahoraria,<br />

Estafuncion s01oesta disponiblesi el Modo Reloj esta<br />

configurado come Auto.<br />

DST (Horatio de Verano) (Apagado / Encendido):Activa o<br />

desactivalafunoi0n del horatiode verano.<br />

Estafuncion s01oesta disponiblesi el Modo Reloj esta<br />

oonfigurado come Auto.<br />

Usodel temporizador de desconexiOn<br />

{_ MENUrrrl _ Configuracion _ Hora _ Temporizador<br />

ENTERI_<br />

Temporizador _: Apaga automaticamenteel<br />

televisortras un periodode tiempo establecido.(30, 60, 90,<br />

120, 150y 180 minutes),<br />

ParacanoelarTemporizador seleccioneApagado.<br />

ActivaciOny desactivaciOndel temporizador<br />

{_ MENUrrrl _ Configuracion _ Hora _ Temporizador 1<br />

ENTERI_<br />

Puedeajustarel TV paraque se enciendaautomaticamentea la<br />

hera prefijada.<br />

[] Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3:<br />

Laactivaci0ny desactivaci0ndel temporizadorse puede<br />

oonfigurarde tres maneras,Debeajustarel relojen primer<br />

lugar.


Horadeencendido / Horade apagado: Puedeconfigurar<br />

la hera y los minutosy activaro desactivareltemporizador.<br />

(Paraactivarel temporizadorcon laconfiguraoiondeseada,<br />

establezcaloen Activar.<br />

Volumen: Configureel nivelde volumendeseado.<br />

Contenido: Seleccioneel contenidoIV o USB que se ha de<br />

reproducircuando el televisorse enciendaautomaticamente.<br />

(USBse puedeseleccionars01ocuando el dispositivoUSB<br />

esta conectadoa]televisor)<br />

NOTA<br />

" Sino hayarohivosde m0sioaen eldispositivo USB<br />

o no se ha seleodonado la carpeta que contenga<br />

los archives de m0sica, eltempodzador no funoiona<br />

correctamente.<br />

" Sis01ohayun archive de fetesen el USB,la<br />

presentaoi0nno se reproduoir&<br />

" Siel hombre de lacarpeta es demasiadolargo,esta<br />

no se seleccionar&<br />

" Cada USBque se utilizaesta asignadoa su propia<br />

carpet& Cuando se utilizamas de un mismotipo de<br />

USB,aseguresede que lacarpeta asignadaa cada<br />

dispositivoUSB tenga un hombre diferente.<br />

Repetir: SeieccioneUna vez, Cada dia, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sab,<br />

Sab~Dom o Manual para configurarlocome masle convenga.<br />

Si seleccionaManual, puedeconfigurarel diaen que desee<br />

activarel temporizador.<br />

La marca _/indioa que se ha seleccionadoel dia.<br />

Apagado automatico (s01odisponiblecuando el televisor se<br />

ha enoendido con el temporizador):Eltelevisorse apagara<br />

automatioamente3 horasdespues de que se hayadejado<br />

inactive para prevenirun sobrecalentamiento.<br />

Programasde bloqueo<br />

(_ MENU[]]] -_ Configuracion --, ENTERE_<br />

" V-Chip no estadisponibie en los modos HDMI,<br />

Componente o PC.<br />

" Elc0digo PINpredeterminado para un televisor nuevoes<br />

"0-0-0-0".<br />

" Perm. todo: Se pulsa para desbloqueartodos los<br />

programasde television.<br />

" Bloq. todo: Se pulsa para bloqueartodos los programas<br />

de television.<br />

[] Bloqueo V-Chip (Apagado/ Encendido): Puedebloquearlos<br />

programasde TV clasificados.<br />

[] Guias pater. TV: Puedebloquearlos programasde TV segun<br />

su clasificaoi0n.Esta funoi0npermitecontrolarIoque los niflos<br />

puedenvet.<br />

- TV-Y: Niflospequeflos/ TV-Y7: Niflosde masde 7 aries/<br />

TV-G:Todoslos p0blicos/ TV-PG:Supervisionpaterna/<br />

TV-14: Mayoresde 14 aries/ TV-MA: Audienciaadulta<br />

- Todo: BIoqueatodas lasclasificacionesde T'vt/ FV:<br />

Violenciay fantasia/ V: Violencia/ S: Contenidosexual/ L:<br />

Lenguajegrosero/ D: Dialogode contenidosexual<br />

La funci0n V-Chip bloquearaautomatioamente<br />

determinadascategoriasque traten materialmas<br />

sensible.Per ejemplo,si bloquea la categoria<br />

TV-Y,automaticamentese bloquearaTV-Y7. De<br />

manerasimilar,si bloquea la categoriaTV-G, todas<br />

las categoriasdel grupo "adolescente"quedaran<br />

bloqueadas(TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 y TV-MA). Las<br />

subclasificaciones(D, L, S, V) funcionande manera<br />

similar.Per Io tanto, si bloquea lasubolasificaci0n<br />

L en TV-PG, las subolasifioacionesL en TV-14 y<br />

TV-MA se bloquearanautomatioamente.<br />

[] Clas. MPAA: Puedebloquearlas peliculasseg@nsu<br />

clasificaci0n.LaAsooiaci0namericanade cinematogra%<br />

(MPAA)hacreado un sistemade clasificaci0nque proporciona<br />

a padresy tutoresinformaci0nsobreque peliculasson<br />

apropiadaspara los niflos.<br />

- G:Todos los publicos(sinrestricciones)./ PG: Se sugierela<br />

compaflia de un adulto./PG-13: Menoresacompaflados<br />

de un adulto. / R: Restringido.Menoresde 17<br />

acompafladosper un adulto./ N0-17: Prohibidoa menores<br />

de 17 aries./ X: S01oadultos./ NR: Sin clasifioar.<br />

La funci0n V-Chip bloquearaautomatioamente<br />

cualquiercategoriaque trate materialmas sensible.<br />

Per ejemplo,si bloquea la categoria PG-13,tambien<br />

se bloquearanautomaticamenteR, N0-17 y X.<br />

[] Ingles Canadiense: Puedebloquearlos programasde TV<br />

V-Ch!p...........................................................................................................................................................................<br />

segun la clasifioaci0nIngl#sCanadiense.<br />

Aparecela pantallapara h introducci0ndel numeroPIN. Escribasu<br />

c0digo PIN de 4 digitos.<br />

La opci0n V-Chipbloqueaautomatioamentelos programasque<br />

no se consideranapropiadospara los menores.Elusuariodebe<br />

introducirprimeroun codigo PIN(numerode identificaoi0npersonal)<br />

para configuraro cambiarlas restriccionesde V-Chip.<br />

- C: Programaci0npara niflosmenoresde 8 aries. /<br />

08+: Programaci0ngeneralmenteconsideradaaceptable<br />

para niflosmayoresde 8 ariessin acompaflamientode<br />

adultos./ G : Programaciongeneral,idealpara todas las<br />

audiencias./ PG : Supervisionpatema./<br />

14+: La programacioncontienetemas y contenidos que<br />

puedeque no seanadeouadospara menoresde I4 aries. /<br />

NOTA<br />

18+: Programaoi0npara adultos.<br />

La funci0n V-Chip bloquearaautomatioamente<br />

cualquiercategoriaque trate materialmas<br />

sensible.Per ejemplo,si bloquea la categoriaG,<br />

automatioamentetambien se bloquearaPG, 14+ y<br />

18+.<br />

Espaflol 21


Funcionesbasicas<br />

[]<br />

[]<br />

[]<br />

FrancesCanadiense: Puedebloquearlos programasde TV<br />

seg0n la clasificacbnFrancesOanadiense,<br />

- G : General/8 ans+: Programacbngeneralmente<br />

consideradaaceptablepara ni_osmayoresde 8 afrossin<br />

acompanamientode adultos,/ 13 ans+: Esposibleque<br />

la programacbnno seaadecuada para ninosmenores<br />

de I3 afros,/ 16 ans+: Laprogramacionno es adecuada<br />

para niF_osmenoresde I6 afros./ 18 ans+: Programacion<br />

restringidapara adultos.<br />

La funcionV-Chip bloquearaautomaticamente<br />

cualquiercategoria que trate material massensible.<br />

Per ejemplo,si bloquea la categoria8 arts+, tambien<br />

se bloquearanautomaticamente13 ans+, 16 ans+<br />

y 18 ans+.<br />

Clasificacion U.S. Descargabie: La informacionde la<br />

restriccionde bloqueose puedeusar mientrasseyen los<br />

canales DT'vt<br />

NOTA<br />

* Sila informaci0nno se descarga desde laemisora,<br />

el men(]Clasificaci6n U.S. Descargable esta<br />

desactivado.<br />

* La informacionde la restriccion de bloqueo se puede<br />

descargar automaticamentemientrasse yenlos<br />

canales DTV.Esto puede tardaralgunossegundos.<br />

* Elmen(] Clasificaci6n U.S. Descargable esta<br />

disponibledespues de que la informacionse haya<br />

descargadodesde la emisora.Sin embargo, segun el<br />

tipo de informacionde laemisora, el menupodria no<br />

estar disponiblepara su use.<br />

* Los nivebs de restriccion de bloqueo difierensegun<br />

la emisora,El hombrede menu predeterminadoy<br />

Clasificaci6n U.S. Descargable cambian segun la<br />

informaciondescargada.<br />

* Aunqueconfigure lavisualizacbn en pantallaen otro<br />

idioma,el men(]Clasificaci6n U.S. Descargable<br />

siempre Iovera en ingles.<br />

* La clasificacion bloquearaautomaticamente<br />

determinadascategoriasque traten materialmas<br />

sensible.<br />

* Los titulosde clasificacion (perejemplo, nivelde<br />

humor,etc,)y las clasificacionesde television(per<br />

ejemplo,DH, MH, H, etc.) puedendiferir segun la<br />

emisora.<br />

Cambiar C6digo: Aparecerala pantallaparacambiar el<br />

c6digo. Escribaun nuevoc6digo PiNde 4 digitos.En cuanto<br />

se introducenlos 4 digitos,aparecela pantalia<br />

Confirmar Nuevo C6digo. Vuelvaa escribirlos 4 digitos,<br />

Cuandodesaparezcala pantallade confirmacion,elcodigo<br />

quedara memorizado.<br />

2 EspaBol<br />

C6mo ver un canal restringido,<br />

Siel TV sesintonizaen un canal restringido,V-ChipIo bloqueara.La<br />

pantallaquedaraen blancoy aparecerael siguientemensaje:<br />

Este canalesta bloqueadoper el V-Chip.IntroduzcaPIN para<br />

desbloquear.<br />

Si olvidael codigo PiN,pulse los botones del mando a<br />

distancia en el siguienteorden para reiniciarel c6digo a<br />

"0-0-0-0": POWER(apagar)_ MUTE _ 8 _ 2 _ 4<br />

POWER(encende0<br />

Otras funciones<br />

Idioma<br />

MENUITrl _ Configuracion _ ENTERE_<br />

AjusteeJidiomade los menus.<br />

1. SeleccioneIdioma del menuy pulse el bot6n ENTERE_.<br />

2. Seleccioneel idiomaque deseey pulseel botch ENTERE_.<br />

Elijauna opci6n entre English, EspaF_oly Frangais.<br />

Subtffulo<br />

(Mensajesde textoen pantalla)<br />

[] Subtitulo (Apagado / Encendido): Puede<br />

activaro desactivarlafuncion de subtitulos.<br />

Si los subt[tulosno estan disponibles,no se<br />

mostraranen la pantalla.<br />

La funcion de subtitulosno esta<br />

disponible en los modes Componente,<br />

HDMI ni PC.<br />

Modo de SubtJtulo: Puedesebcdonar el modede subt[tulo<br />

deseado.<br />

La disponibilidad de los subtitulos depende del<br />

programa que se esteemitiendo.<br />

Programado / OO1~004 / Textol ~Texto4:(s61ocanabs<br />

analogicos)La funcbn de subtitulosanalogicosfuncionatanto<br />

en el mode de canal de televisionanabgicacome cuando la<br />

senalse dirige de un dispositivoextemo al televisor.(Seg0nla<br />

senalde transmisi6n,la funci6nde subtitulosanalogicospuede<br />

funcionarcon canabs digitabs.)<br />

Programado / Serviciol ~ServicJo6/ OO1~004 /<br />

Textol ~Texto4: (solocanabs digitabs) La funci6nde<br />

subtitulosdigitalesfuncionaconcanabs digitales.<br />

Es posibb que Servicio 1~6 no est@ldisponibles en el<br />

modo de subtitulos digitalessegun el tipo de emisi6n.


[] Opciones -Subtitulos Dig.: (solo canabs digitabs)<br />

TamaSo: Lasopdones induyen Programatic, Peque_o,<br />

Normal yGrande. Elvalor predeterminado esNormal.<br />

Estilo fuente: Lasopciones induyen Programado yEstilo del0<br />

al7.Elvalor predeterminado esEstilo0.<br />

Color deprimer piano: Lasopdones induyen Programado,<br />

Bhnoo, Negro, Rojo, Verde, Azul, Amarillo, Magenta, Oian.<br />

Puede cambiar elcolor del texto. Elvalor predeterminado es<br />

Bhnoo.<br />

Color derondo: Lasopciones induyen Programado,<br />

Bhnoo, Negro, Rojo, Verde, Azul, Amarillo, Magenta, Oian.<br />

Puede cambiar elcolor del rondo delosubtitulos. Elvalor<br />

predeterminado esNegro.<br />

Opacidad deprimer piano: Ajusta laopacidad del texto.<br />

Lasopdones induyen Programatic, Transparente, TrasBddo,<br />

S61ido eIntermitente.<br />

Opacidad defondo: Ajusta laopaddad del rondo delos<br />

subt[tulos. Lasopdones induyen Programado, Transparente,<br />

TrasBddo, Solido eIntermitente.<br />

Regresar alPredeterminado: Estaoption reajusta las<br />

opdones Tamano, Estbfuente, Color deprimer piano, Color<br />

derondo, Opaddad deprimer piano yOpaddad derondo a<br />

susvalores predeterminados.<br />

NOTA<br />

* Las Opciones - Subtitulos Dig. solo estan<br />

disponibbs cuando Programado y<br />

Servbiol ~ Servbio6 se pueden sebcdonar en el<br />

Mode de Subtitulo.<br />

* La dbponbilidad de los subt[tulos dependedel<br />

programa que se esteemitiendo.<br />

* ElvalorProgramado sigue los estandares<br />

estableddos per el ember.<br />

* Lasopdones de color de primer piano y color de<br />

fondo no se pueden ajustar con elmbmo color.<br />

* No puedeestablecerla Opacidad de primer piano<br />

y la Opacidad de fondo come Transparente.<br />

Modo Juego (Apagado / Encendido) ..................................<br />

Cuandose oonecta unavideooonsolaoomo PlayStationTM o<br />

XboxTM, se puede experimentarunasensacbn masrealbtaal<br />

seleccionarel mode de juegos.<br />

NOTA<br />

* Precaudonesy limitadonesdel modo de juego.<br />

- Si deseadesconectarsede laconsola de videojuegos<br />

y conectarsea otto dispositivoexterno,ajuste la<br />

opcion Modo Juego oomo Apagado enel menu de<br />

configuracion.<br />

- Sivisualizael menude TV en el Modo Juego, la pantalla<br />

tbmbla ligeramente.<br />

* Modo Juego no esta disponiblecuando la fuentede<br />

entradaesta en el mode TV o PC.<br />

* Tras conectar laconsola de videojuegos,configure Modo<br />

Juego come Encendido. Desgradadamente,puedeque<br />

advierta una reduction en lacalidad de la imagen.<br />

* Siel Modo Juego esta Encendido:<br />

- El modo Imagen seconfiguracome Normal y elde<br />

Sonido como Cine.<br />

- Ecualizador no estadbponible.<br />

Melodia (Apagado / Bajo / Medic / Alto)<br />

Estabbzca que una melodiase oigacuando el televisorse enobnda<br />

o seapague.<br />

NOTA<br />

, La melodia no se reproduce.<br />

- Ouando no haysalidade sonidodesde el tebvbor<br />

porque se ha acdvadoel botch MUTE.<br />

- Ouando no haysalidade sonidodesde el tebvbor<br />

porque se ha reducidoal minimocon el botch VOL -.<br />

- Ouando lafundon de temporizadorhaapagadoel<br />

tebvbor.<br />

Soluciones econ6micas<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Configuraci6n_ ENTERI_<br />

La funcionecologioase puedeutilizarpara mejorarel ahorrode<br />

energia.<br />

Ahorro energia (Apagado / Bajo / Medic / Alto<br />

!Auto) ......................................................................................<br />

Esta fundon ajustael brillodel televisor,Io cual reduceeloonsumo<br />

de energia.Sideseaver latelevisionper lanoche, ajustela option<br />

del modeAhorro energia en Alto; sus ojos se Io agradecerany,<br />

ademas,redudra eloonsumo de energia.<br />

Espanol 23


Funcionesbasicas<br />

MENUITrl _ Soporte tecnico -_ ENTERE_<br />

Autodiagn6stico<br />

Elautodiagnostico puede tardar unossegundos;es parte del<br />

funcionamientonormaldel televisor.<br />

[] Prueba de imagen: Se utilizapara comprobarsi hay<br />

problemasell la imagen.<br />

Si: Si no se muestrael patron de prueba o Ilay ruidoen el<br />

patron de prueba,seleccioneSf. PuedeIlaberun problemaen<br />

el televisor.Pongaseen oontacto cell el centrede llamadasde<br />

Samsungpara obtenerayuda.<br />

No: Siel patron de prueba se muestracorrectamente,<br />

seleccioneNo. Puedehaber un problemaell el equipo extemo.<br />

Compruebelas conexiones.Si persisteel problem& consulte el<br />

manualdel usuariodel dispositivoextemo.<br />

[] Prueba de sonido: Utiliceel sonidode lamelodiainoorporada<br />

para comprobarsi hayproblemascon elsonido.<br />

Si no eyesonido en los altavocesdel televisor,antes<br />

de realizarla prueba de sonido, aseguresede que<br />

Seleccionar altavoz esteconfigurado come<br />

Altavoz de TV en el menu Sonido.<br />

La melodiase oira durante laprueba aunque<br />

Seleccionar altavoz esteestablecido come<br />

Altavoz externo o se hayasilenciado el sonido con el<br />

boton MUTE..<br />

Si: Sisolo puedeoir sonidode un altavozo no se eyesonido<br />

durante laprueba de sonido, seleocioneSi. Puedehaberun<br />

problemaen eltelevisor.Pongaseen contacto con el centrede<br />

Ilamadasde Samsungpara obtenerayuda.<br />

No: Si puedeoir sonidode los altavoces,seleocioneNo.<br />

Puedehaber un problemaen el equipo extemo. Compruebe<br />

las conexiones.Si persisteel problema,consulte el manualdel<br />

usuariodel dispositivoextemo.<br />

[] Intensidad sepal: (Solooanalesdigitales)La calidadde la<br />

recepcionde un canal HD es perfectao los canalesno estan<br />

disponibles.Ajustelaantena paraaumentarla intensidadde<br />

la serial.<br />

4 Espa_ol<br />

Actualizaci6n del software<br />

Samsungpuedeofreceractualizacionespara elfirmwaredel<br />

televisoren el future.VisiteSamsung.como pongaseen contacto<br />

con elcentre de Ilamadasde Samsungen 1-800-SAMSUNG<br />

(726-7864)para recibir informacionacercade ladescarga<br />

de lasactualizacionesy deluse de un oontroladorUSB.Las<br />

actualizacionesse puedenrealizaroonectando unaunidad USBal<br />

puerto USB.<br />

Ouando se actualizael software,la configuracionde video<br />

y audio que se hayaefectuado vuelvea la configuracion<br />

predeterminada(de fabrica).<br />

Esaconsejableanotar laconfiguracionpara recuperarla<br />

facilmentedespuesde la actualizacion.<br />

Guia de conexiOn HD<br />

Oonsulteestainformacioncuando conectedispositivosextemos al<br />

televisor.<br />

Contacto con Samsung ........................................................<br />

Consulteestainformacionsi eltelevisorno funciona<br />

adecuadamenteo si desea actualizarelsoftware.Puedebuscar<br />

informacionrelacionadacon nuestrocentrede Ilamadas,para<br />

descargarlos productosy el software.


Funcionesavanzadas<br />

I<br />

Disfrutede archivosde fotos, musicay almacenados<br />

en un dispositivode dase de almacenamientomasivo<br />

(MSC)USB,<br />

(_ MENUrlTl -_ Aplicaciones _ Media Play<br />

(USB) _ ENTERE_<br />

ConexiOnde un dispositivo USB<br />

1. Enciendael televisor.<br />

2. Conecte un dispositivoUSBque contengaarchivosde fotos, o m0sicaalterminalUSB que se<br />

encuentraen el lateraldel televisor.<br />

3. Cuandoel USBestaconectado altelevisor,apareceunaventana emergente.A continuacion<br />

puedeseleccionarMedia Play,<br />

Usodel men_ Media Play<br />

Visualizacion de una foto (o una presentacion)<br />

1. Pulseel botch MENU. Pulselos botches A o T paraseleccionar<br />

Aplicaciones, a continuacion,pulseel botch ENTERE_.<br />

2. Pulselos botches A o _' para seleccionarMedia Play (USB)y, a<br />

continuacion,pulse el botch ENTERI_.<br />

3. Pulselos botches A o T para seleccionarel dispositivode memoriaUSB<br />

correspondientey,a continuacion,pulse elbotch ENTERI_,<br />

Elment]Media Playpuedevadar segun el dispositivode memoriaUSB<br />

conectado al televisor,<br />

Algunosdispositivosquizas no se admitan pot problemasde<br />

compatibilidad,<br />

4. Pulselos botches ,4 o i_ para seleccionar(Photo, Music, Setup),y a<br />

continuad0n, pulse el botch ENTERIng.<br />

Puedeque no funcionecorrectamente con archivos multimediasin licencia,<br />

Listade Io que debe saber antes de utilizarMedia Play (USB)<br />

* En un hombre de carpeta o de archivo(foto, m0sica)solo se deben utilizarcaracteres alfanumericos.<br />

UnidadUSB<br />

PanellateraldelTV<br />

* Elsistema de archivos solo admite el FAT16/32,(Nose admite elsistema de archivo NTFS,)Algunostipos de dispositivosde audio<br />

y camarasdigitales USB puedenno ser compatiblescon este televisor,<br />

* Media Play(USB)solo admite eldispositivo de clase de almacenamientomasivo(MSO)USB,MSCes un dispositivode clase<br />

de almacenamientomasivosolo de transporte de gran capacidad. Ejemplosde MSOson las unidadesde almacenamientoen<br />

miniaturay los lectoresde tarjetas Flash, (Nose admite ni el HUB niel USB.)<br />

* Antes de conectar el dispositivo altelevisor, hagauna copia de seguridadde sus archivos para evitar daflos o perdidasde datos,<br />

SAMSUNGno se haceresponsablepor cualquier daflo en los archivos o perdidade datos,<br />

* Oonectedirectamenteal puerto USB deltelevisor.Si utilizauna conexion con un cable independiente,puede haber problemasde<br />

compatibilidadcon el USB.<br />

Espaflol 25


Funcionesavanzadas<br />

Photo<br />

* Solo se admiten los formatosde archivomp3 y jpeg,<br />

* Elformate rap3 del reproductor multimedia(USB)solo admite archives de musicacon unafrecuenciade muestreoalta(32 kHz,<br />

44,1kHz o 48 kHz),<br />

* Se recomiendael formatojpeg secuencial,<br />

* No desconecte el dispositivo USBmientras seeste cargando.<br />

* MTP (MediaTransfer Protocol)no se admite,<br />

* La duracion de lareproduccion de un archiverap3 puedevisualizarsecome "00:00:00" si la informaciondel tiempo de<br />

reproduccion no se encuentraen el inicio delarchive,<br />

* Ouanto mayorseala resolution de ]a imagen, mastiempo tardara en visualizarseen ]a pantaHa.<br />

* Las]istasde fotoso musicamuestranhasta 300 carpetas o archives,<br />

* Segunel tamaflo del archive,el proceso de carga puede requerircierto tiempo.<br />

* Losarchives MP3 con DRM descargados desde un sitio de page no se puedenreproducir,<br />

* La tecnolog[aGestion de derechos digitales (DRM)admite la creacion,la distribuciony lagestion de contenidosde mode<br />

integradoy general,incluidala proteccion de los derechos e interesesde los proveedores de los contenidos, la prevencionde<br />

copias ilegalesde los contenidos, as[come lagestion de cobros y acuerdos.<br />

* Elmode de ahorrode energiade algunasunidadesde disco duro extemas se puededesactivar automaticamentecuando estas se<br />

conectan a]televisor.<br />

* Sise utiliza un cable de extension USB,es posibleque el dispositivoUSB no se reconozcao que los archives del dispositivono se<br />

puedanleer.<br />

* Sino se reconoce un dispositivo USBconectado a] televisor,]a]ista de archives del dispositivoesta daflada oun archive de la ]ista<br />

no se reproduce, conecteel dispositivo USBal ordenador,formatee el dispositivoy compmebe laconexion,<br />

* Siun archiveeliminadodel ordenador se puede encontrartodav[a cuando se ejecuta Media Play,utilice lafuncion "Vaciarpapelera<br />

de reciclaje"del ordenador para eliminarlopermanentemente,<br />

VisualizaciOnde una foto (o una presentacion)<br />

1. Pulseel botch II/FO ara mostrarla opcionVet, Inic. vis. aut., Borrar, Borrar<br />

todo, Deselecc. todos.<br />

2. Pulselos botches A o _' para seleccionarInic. vis. aut. y pulse el botch<br />

ENTERI_.<br />

Enla presentacion,los archivesse muestranen orden a partir del<br />

archive que se muestraen este memento,<br />

Losarchives MP3se pueden reproducir automaticamentedurante la<br />

presentacion si Musica de fondo esta configuradacome Encendido<br />

de manerapredeterminada. Paraque esta funcionsea posible, los<br />

archives MP3y otros archives de fotos debenestar en la misma<br />

carpeta del dispositivode memoriaUSB,<br />

Pulseel botch INFO durantela presentacion para configurar las opciones siguientesVelocidad visionado automatico, Musica de<br />

rondo, ConfiguraciOn de la musica de fondo, Lista, Pulse los botches A o T para seleccionarla opcion y, a continuacion,pulse el<br />

botch ENTERE_.<br />

- Unavez configuradalaopcion, pulseel botch ENTERI_ para realizarel cambio.<br />

Pulseel botch INFO durantela presentacion para configurar las opciones siguientes Inic. vis. aut., Zoom, Girar, Lista, Pulselos<br />

botches A o T paraseleccionar laopcion y, a continuacion, pulseel botch EI/TERI_.<br />

- Unavez configuradalaopcion, pulseel botch ENTERI_ para realizarel cambio.<br />

6 Espaflol


Music<br />

Uso de la lista MP3<br />

Iconode carpeta<br />

Iconode la listade mt]sica<br />

Iconode desplazarsea carpetade nivelanterior<br />

Pulselos botones F_q(REW)o [#_q(FF)paracambiar de pagina.<br />

Elarchivo sebccionado se visualizaen la parte superior con su tiempo de<br />

reproduccion.<br />

1. Parasebccionar todos los archivoso uno solo, pulseel botch INFO para ver<br />

los menusde Musica.<br />

Pulseel botch ENTERE_ para sebccionar Reproduccion (orRepr. archivo<br />

selecc.), Repetir musica, Borrar (orBorrar archivo sel.),Borrar todo or<br />

Deselecc. todos.<br />

2. Pubelos botches A o T para ira un iconoy pulseel bot0n ENTERIng.<br />

Si sepulsa el botch ENTERE_ sobre un icono de nota musical,<br />

inmediatamentese reproduceel archivode m0sica,<br />

Pulseel botch ENTERE_ sobreel icono de una carpetapara mostrarlos<br />

archivosde musicaincluidosen dicha carpeta,<br />

[] Reproducir: Seleccionarpara reproducirarchivos MP3,<br />

EstemenL]s61omuestraarchivos con ]a extension MP3.Los archivoscon otrasextensionesno semuestran, aunquese hayan<br />

guardado en el mismo dispositivo USB.<br />

Paraajustar elvolumende la m0sica, pulse los botones --VOL+ del mandoa distanda. Parasilenciarel sonido, pulseel<br />

botch _ MUTE del mandoa distancia,<br />

[] Repetir musica (Encendido / Apagado): Sebcdone para reproducirrepetidamentetodos los archivos MP3de lacarpetaactual.<br />

Reproduccion de musica<br />

® S01ose muestranbs archivoscon laextensionMP3, Losarchivoscon otras extensionesno semuestran,aunquese hayanguardadoen<br />

el mismodispositivoUSB,<br />

• Si,al reprodudr archivosMP3,el sonido no se oyecorrectamente,ajuste Ecuaiizador y SRSTruSurround HD en el menuSonido. (Un<br />

archivoMP3 demasiadomodulado puedeocasionarprobbmas de sonido,)<br />

• Iconosde informacionde la funcionde lamusica<br />

J Repetir musica estaestabbcido como Encendido.<br />

Repetir musica estaestabbcido como Apagado,<br />

Cuandosepulsae]boton F_q (Reproducir)/ _ (Pausa)delmandoa distanciambntrasseestareproducbndomL]sica.<br />

Ouandose pusa e botch Fiq DeteneOde mandoa dstanca, a musca se detene.<br />

Espaflol 27


Funcionesavanzadas<br />

Configuraci6n<br />

Uso del menlJde configuracion<br />

[] Velocidad visionado automatico: Permiteseleccionarlavelocidadde<br />

presentacionde1visionadoautomatico.PuedeselecdonarRapido, Normal<br />

o Lento.<br />

[] Musica de fondo: Seseleccionapara determinarsi sedesea reproducirun<br />

archiveMP3 duranteelvisionadoautomatico.PuedeseleccionarMt]sica<br />

Encendido o MOsicaApagado.<br />

[] Configuraci6n de la musica de rondo: Ouandoseesta realizandouna<br />

presentacion,se puedecambiara Configuracion de la musica de fondo<br />

para selecdonarun archivode mosicay escucharlo.Seleccioneun archivo<br />

MP3 como mL]sicade fondo.<br />

[] Repetir musica: Se seleccionapara determinarsi se desea repetirla<br />

reproduccionde la mt]sicacuando se han reproducidotodos los archivos<br />

MP3 de estacarpeta.<br />

[] Salvapantallas: Puedeconfigurarel tiempo de esperanecesariopara quese ejecuteel salvapantalhs.Elsalvapantallasaparecerasi no<br />

se pulsa ningL]nboton durante4 hora, 8 hora o 10 hora.<br />

[] Retirar con seg: Se puedequitarel dispositivodeltelevisorcon seguridad.<br />

Reproduccion de archivos de musica/fotos seleccionados<br />

• Pulsarel boton amarillo.<br />

• Repitael procesoanteriorpara seleccionarlos archivosde fotos/mosicaque desee.<br />

Lasfotoso los archivosseleccionadosse marcancon el sfmbolo _z. Paracancelar laseleccion, pulse de nuevoel boton<br />

amarillo.<br />

• Pulseel boton FCq(Reprodudr)/ ENTERI_ para reproducir1asfotoso archivosselecdonados.<br />

8 Espa_ol


Inforrnad©nadidonal<br />

Montaje del soporte de proteccion<br />

AI instalarel televisorell unapared, coloqueel soportede proteccioncome se indica, ,, oo_oo_ooo<br />

Instalacion del equipo de montaje mural<br />

Elkit de montaje mural(sevende por separado)permiteinstalarel televisoren unapared, Sidesea mas informaci0nsobre lainstalacionde<br />

los componentes parael montaje mural,consulte las instruccionesque se facilitancon dichoselementos,Sinecesitaayuda con la instalacion<br />

del soportemural,p0ngaseen contacto con un tecnico. SamsungElectronicsno se haceresponsablede los daflos causadosal productoo<br />

al usuariosi este haefectuado la instalaciondel televisor.<br />

Especificaciones del equipo de montaje mural (VESA)<br />

Elkit de montaje muralse vende per separado,<br />

Instaleel montajemuralen una paredsolida,perpendicularal suelo,Paracolocarlo en otros materialesde construccion,p0ngaseen<br />

contacto con eldistribuidormascercano,Si se instalaen el techo o en una paredinclinada,puedecaersey causargraveslesiones<br />

personales.<br />

NOTA<br />

* Lasdimensionesestandarde los equipos de montajemural se muestranen latabla siguiente.<br />

* AIadquirir elequipo de montajemural,tambien sedistribuye un manualde instalaciondetalladoy todas las piezasnecesarias para<br />

el montaje.<br />

* No usetornillos que no cumplan las especificacionesde tomillos estandarVESA,<br />

* No usetornillos con una Iongitud superiora lamedida estandaro que no cumplancon las especificacionesde tornillos estandar<br />

VESA,Lostornillos que seandemasiado largos puedencausar daflos en el interiordel televisor.<br />

* Para montajesmuralesque no cumplen las especificacionesde tomillos estandarVESA,la Iongitudde estos puedevariar<br />

dependiendode las especificacionesdel montaje mural.<br />

* No aprieteexcesivamentelos tornillos, yaque podriadaflar el productoo provocar laca[da de estecon riesgo de causar lesiones<br />

personales.Samsung no se hace responsablede estetipo de accidentes.<br />

* Samsungno se hace responsablede daflos o lesionespersonalescuando se usa un montaje muralque no cumple las<br />

especificacionesVESAo si el clienteno sigue las instruccionesde instalaciondel producto.<br />

* No monteel televisorcon unainclinacionde masde 15 grades,<br />

* Son necesariasdos personas para montar el televisoren lapared,<br />

Espaflol 29


Inforrnad©nadidonal<br />

I9-22<br />

75 x 75<br />

23-29 200x I00<br />

lOOx I00 M4<br />

30-40 200x 200 M6<br />

LCD-TV 4<br />

46-55 400x 400<br />

57-65 600 x 400<br />

70-80 800 x 400<br />

80- 1400x 800<br />

M8<br />

/_ No instaleel equipo de montaje muralmientraseltelevisorestaencendido.Se podriaproduciruna descarga<br />

electrica con riesgode causarlesionespersonales,<br />

Samsungno suministraelbloqueo antirroboKensington,Esun dispositivoque<br />

se utilizapara fijarf[sicamenteelsistemacuando se utilizaen un sitio poblico, El<br />

aspectoy el metodo de bloqueo puedenset diferentesa los que se muestranen la _°°<br />

ilustraci6nsegun el fabricante.OonsuReel manualproporcionadocon el bloqueo<br />

Kensingtonpara obtener masinformacionsobreel usecorrecto.<br />

Busqueel Jcono"@" en laparte posteriordel televisor.Junto al Jcono"@" hay<br />

una ranuraKensington,<br />

Siga estos pasospara bloquearel producto:<br />

1. Enrolleelcable deJbloqueoKensingtonen un objeto estatico voluminoso,<br />

como una mesao una silla,<br />

2. DesJic el extremedeJcable que tieneel cierrea traves deJextremoenrollado<br />

del cablede bloqueo Kensington,<br />

3. Inserteeldispositivode bloqueoen la ranuraKensingtondel producto O,<br />

4. Cierreel bloqueo,<br />

Paraobtener instruccionesmas exactas, censure el manualdel usuario proporcionado con el dispositivode bloqueo,<br />

Eldispositivo de bloqueo debe adquirirseper separado,<br />

La ubicaci6nde la ranuraKensingtonpuede variarsegun el televisor,<br />

0 EspaBol<br />

B<br />


Precaucion: Tirar del tebvisor, empujarlo ocolgarse de61puede provocar sucaida. Enespecial, impida quelosni_os<br />

secuelguen del televisor oIodesestabilicen. Eltelevisor podria caerse sobre ellos ycausarles bsiones graves oincluso<br />

lamuerte. Siga lasprecauciones deseguridad del folleto deseguridad incluido coneltelevisor. Foradded stability and<br />

safety, youcanpurchase andinstall <strong>the</strong>anti falldevice asdescribed below,<br />

Kit de soporte del televisor (sevende pot separado):<br />

The parts below are included in <strong>the</strong> TV Holder kit. Ademas, debera proveerse de un tornillo para madera, un tornillo y un perno<br />

u otro tipo de tornillo adecuado para la pared o el armario donde vaya a asegurar el soporte del televisor. We recommend a size<br />

M4xL20 wood screw.<br />

Instalacion del soporte del televisor<br />

1. Remove<strong>the</strong> screw attachedto <strong>the</strong> back of your T_, and <strong>the</strong>n connect<strong>the</strong> Tv-Holder to <strong>the</strong> TV with <strong>the</strong> screw includedin <strong>the</strong>Tv-Holder<br />

Kitthat is designatedfor yourT'v(<br />

2,<br />

3,<br />

Use s01oel tornillosuministrado,Si utilizaun tornillodiferentepodria danar el tebvbor.<br />

Firmlyfasten <strong>the</strong> screwyou provided(sizeM4xL20 orsimilar)to <strong>the</strong> wall or cabinetwhere <strong>the</strong> TV is to be installed,<br />

Siva a utilizareJtornillo sobre una pared es aconsejabb montarlosobre un montante,Siesto no es posbb, utilice un perno<br />

para anclareJtornillo,<br />

Tie <strong>the</strong> Tv-Holdercord to <strong>the</strong> screwfastenedon <strong>the</strong>wall or cabinetso that <strong>the</strong> TV is fixed, See<strong>the</strong> illustrationsbelow.<br />

Instab eJtelevisor cerca de la pared para que no caiga.<br />

Cuando instab eJsoporte deJtelevisor en la pared, asegureel cable nivelado respectoal suelo o inclinadohada abajo pot<br />

motivos de seguridad,<br />

Compruebe de vez en cuando que el cable estefirme,<br />

Cuando desee moverel tebvbor, debe quitar, primero,el cable de conexion,<br />

4. Compruebeque todas lasconexionesesten bienaseguradas,Periodicallycheck <strong>the</strong> connectionsfor anysign of fatigue or failure.Si<br />

tbne dudas sobre laseguridadde lainstahci0n, pongaseen contacto con un instahdor profesional,<br />

Para adquirir el kit del soporte del televisor, pongase en contacto con el centro de atencion al cliente de Samsung.<br />

- In <strong>the</strong> UnitedStates: 1-800-SAMSUNG(I-800-726-7864)<br />

- In Canada:1-800-SAMSUNG(I-800-726-7864)<br />

Espaflo131


Inforrnad©nadidonal<br />

Si cree que el televisor tbne un problema, compruebe primero esta Iista de posibles problemas y soluciones. Si ninguno de los consqos<br />

fundona, visite "www.samsung.com" y haga clic ell Support o Ilame al centro de atencion al clbnte de Samsung al 1-800-SAMSUNG.<br />

Imagendeficiente Enprimerlugar,ejeoutelaPruebade imagen paraConfirmnar queeltelevisormuestrecorrectamentelaimagende<br />

prueba.(Vayaa MENU- Soportet_cnioo, Autodiagn6stioo _Pruebade imagen)(pag,24)<br />

Silaimagende h pruebasemuestracorrectamente,laimagendefbientepuedeprovenirde lafuenteo h serial,<br />

Laimagendel televisornosevetanbiencome o Sitbne undecodificadorper cabb/sateliteanaBgbo,cambieloperundecodificadordigitalHD.Utiliceun cable<br />

enla tbnda. HDMIode componentesparaconseguirunacalidadde imagendealta definid6n(HD).<br />

o Suscriptoresde cabb/satelite:Pruebeconestacionesde altadefinid6n(HD)enlaofertade canabs.<br />

o Conexi6ndeantena:Pruebecon emieorasdealtadefinbi6n(HD)despuesde ejecutarla programad6n<br />

aubmatba.<br />

_ Muchoscanabsde altadefinici6n(HD)mqoranlos contenidosSD(StandardDefinition).<br />

o Ajustelaresoluci6nde lasalidadevideodel decodificadordecableo sateliteen 1080io720p.<br />

Laimagensevedistorsionada:errorde o Lacompresi6ndeloscontenidosde videopuedecausarimagenesdistorsionadas,espeoialmentenlasescenas<br />

macroUoques,microUoques,puntos, demovimbntor@ido,come enlosdeportesy laspeliculasde acci6n.<br />

pixelizaci6n, o Unnivelde serialdebilpuedecausarimagenesdistorsionadas.Noesun problemadeltelevisor.<br />

o Losteldonosm6vibsque seutilizancercadel televisor(aproximadamentea I metro)puedencausarintefferencias<br />

enla imagendel televisordigitaly anal6gico.<br />

Elcoloresde malacalidadofalta, o Siutilizauna conexi6ndecomponentes,compruebeque loscablesde loscomponentesestenconectadosenlos<br />

terminabscorrectos.Lasconexionesincorrectasosueltaspuedenoriginarproblemasenel coloroque lapantalla<br />

sequedeen blaneo.<br />

Elcoloro elbrilloesdemalacalidad. , Ajustelasopcionesde Imagenen elmenudel T_ (vayaa losmodesImagen/Oolor/Brillo/Definicion)(pag.16)<br />

, Ajustelaopci6nAhorro energiaen elmen0Oonfiguracion(pag.16).<br />

o Intentereiniciarlaimagenparaverla configuraci6nde imagenpredeterminada. (vayaa MENU- Imagen -<br />

Reiniciode la imagen)(pag.18)<br />

Hayunalineade puntosenel bordela pantalla, o Sieltamariode laimagenestaestablecidoenAjuste pantalla,cambbloa 16:9(pag.17).<br />

o Cambblaresoluci6ndeldecodificadordecable/satelite.<br />

Laimagenseve s61oenblancoy negro, o Siestautilizandouna entradacompuestaAV,conecteel cabledevideo(amarillo)en elterminalverdede laentrada<br />

1de componentesdel televisor.<br />

AIcambiardecanal,la imagensecongela,seve o Siestaconectadoal receptorde cable,reinici este. (vue_aa conectarel cabledealimentaci6ny esperea que el<br />

distorsionadao apareoeconretraso, deoodificadorsereinicb.Puedetardarunos20minutes.)<br />

o Establezcala resoluci6nde salidadel decodificadordecableen1080io72%.<br />

Enp@_ne r lugar,ejecutela Pruebade sonido parac0nfirrna_que elaudiodeltelevisorfuncionacorrectamente.<br />

(VayaaMENU- Soportet_cnico ,.Autediagn6stico _Pruebade sonido)_ag. 24)<br />

Sielaudioescorrecto,elprobbmadel sonidopuedeprovenirde lafuenteola serial,<br />

Nohaysonidoose eyedemasiadobajocon el o Oompruebeelvolumendeldispositivo(deoodificadorde cabb/satelite,DVD,Blu-ray,etc.)conectadoaltelevisor.<br />

volumenal m6ximo.<br />

Laimagenesbuenaperono haysonido, o Oonfigurela opci6nSeleceionaraltavoz comeAltavoz de"IV enel menude Sonido(pag.20).<br />

o Siutilizaundispositivoextemo,compruebeque loscabbs de audioestenconectadosalosterminabsde entrada<br />

deaudiocorrectosdeltelevisor.<br />

o Siutilizaundispositivoextemo,compruebeque laopci6nde salidadeaudiodel dispositivo(perejemplo,quizas<br />

debacambiarla opci6nde audiodeldecodificadorde cablea HDMIsitbne coneotadoHDMIaltelevisor).<br />

o SiseutilizauncableDVla HDMI,senecesitauncablede audioindependiente.<br />

o Sieltelevisortbne unterminaldeauriculares,aseguresede queestosnoestenconectados.<br />

o Reinicieeldispositivoconectadovolviendoa conectarel cablede alimentaci6ndel dispositivo.<br />

Losaltavoceshacenun ruidoinapropiado, o Oompruebelasconexionesdel cableCompruebeque no hayaun cablede videoconeotadoa unaentradade<br />

audio.<br />

2 Espaflol<br />

o Parala conexiondela antenao el cable,compruebela potenciadeserial.Unnivelde serialdebilpuedecausar<br />

distorsionesenel sonido.<br />

o EjecutelaPruebade sonido comese haexplicadoanteriormente.


i ii iii!iii iiL iJJJJJJ iJJJi! JJJJJJJjJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ .............. Lii.........................................................................<br />

i@<br />

Nohayimagen,no hayvideo<br />

Eltelevisornoseenciende, o Compruebequeel cablede alimentaci6nCAestebienconectadoen latomadela paredyen el televisoc<br />

o Compruebequela tomade laparedfuncione.<br />

o Intentepulsarel bot6nPOWERdel televisorparaasegurarsede queel problemanoestaenel mandoadistancia.<br />

Sieltelevisorseenciende,consulte"Elmandoadistancianofunciona"acontinuaci6n.<br />

Eltelevisorse apagaautomaticamente, o CompruebesilaopcionTemporizadorestaestablecidaenApagado enel men0Configuracion(_g. 20).<br />

o Sieltelevisorestaconectadoaun PC,compruebelaconfiguraci6nde laalimentaci6nde este.<br />

o Compruebequeel cablede alimentaci6nCAestebienconectadoen latomadela paredyen el televisor.<br />

o Cuandosevela televisi6ncon unaconexiondeantenao cable,eltelevisorseapagatras f0-f 5 minutossi nohay<br />

sepal.<br />

Nohayimagennivideo, o Compruebelasconexionesde loscables(desconeotey vuelvaa coneotartodos loscablesdeltelevisory delos<br />

dispositivosexternos).<br />

o Establezsalasalidadevideodeldispositivoexterno(deoodiflcadordecable/satelite,DVD,Blu-ray,etc.)de modo<br />

Conexi6nRF(Cable/Antena)<br />

quecoincidaconlasconexionesde laentradadeTV.Perejemplo,si lasalidade undispositivoexternoes HDMI,<br />

sedebeconectarauna entradaHDMIen eltelevisor.<br />

o Compruebequelosdispositivosexternosestenencendidos.<br />

o Aseguresede seleccionarlafuentecorreotadelTV pulsandoel bot6nSOURCEdel mandoadistancia.<br />

o ReinicieeldispositivoconeotadovoMendoa conectarel cablede alimentaci6ndel dispositivo.<br />

Eltelevisornorecibetodos loscanales, o Compruebequeel cablecoaxialestefirmementeconeotado.<br />

o EjecuteProg.Auto paraariadirloscanalesdisponiblesa laIistadesanales.Vayaa MENU- Canal - Prog.Auto,<br />

seleccioneAutoy asegOresede queen elmenuesteestablecidoeltipo correctodeserialde TVpotcable. Hay3<br />

opciones(STD,HRCeIRC)(pag.14)<br />

,, Compruebelaposici6ndela antena.<br />

Nohaysubtitulosenloscanalesdigitales, o Compruebeelmenude configuraci6nde lossubtitulos.IntentecambiarelModo de Subtitulo Serviciol a OO1<br />

(_g. 22).<br />

,, Algunoscanalesno tienendatesdesubtitulos.<br />

Laimagensevedistorsionada:errorde o Lacompresi6ndeloscontenidosde videopuedesausarimagenesdistorsionadasespeoialmenten lasescenas<br />

macrobloques,microbloques,puntos, demovimientorapido,como enlosdeportesy laspaliculasde acci6n.<br />

pixelizaci6n, o Unnivelde serialdebilpuedecausarimagenesdistorsionadas.Noesun problemadeltelevisor.<br />

Conexi6nde PC<br />

Apareceun mensajede "Modono compatible". ,, Establezcalareeoluci6nde salidadelPCde modoqueeoincidaconlaresoluci6nadmitidapor eltelevisor(pag.12).<br />

"PC"siempreapareoeen lalistadefuentes o Estoesnormal;"PC"siempreapareoeenla listade fuentesaunqueno hayaningOnPCconectado.<br />

aunqueel PCnoesteconectado.<br />

Laimagenesbuenaperono hayeonido, o Ifyouareusingan HDMIconnection,check<strong>the</strong>audiooutputsettingonyour PC.<br />

Otros<br />

Barrashorizontalesrodantesde color p0rpurd o Desconectelosterminalesdeaudioizquierdoy dereohodel decodifisador.Siloszumbidoscesan,estoindicaque<br />

verdey zumbidosenlosaltavocesdel televisor eldecodificadortieneunproblemaen laconexi6na tierra.Sustitwaloscablesde videode componentespot una<br />

conla conexi6ndelcabledecomponentes, conexi6nHDMI.<br />

Laimagenno semuestraenpantallacompleta, o Encada ladose muestranbarrasnegrasenloscanalesde altaddinici6n(HD)cuandosemuestrancontenidos<br />

SDmejorados(4:3).<br />

o Semuestranbarrasnegrasenlas partesinferiory superiorcuandoseyen peliculasquetienendiferenteformato<br />

queel televisor.<br />

o Ajustelaopci6ndeltama_ode imagendeldispositivoexternoo deltelevisoralmode depantallacompleta.<br />

Elmandoadistancianofunciona, o Cambielaspilasdel mandoadistancia;hagacoincidirlos polos(+/-).<br />

o Limpielaventanadetransmisi6ndel sensordel mandoadistancia.<br />

o Apuntecon elmandoa distanciadirectamenteal televisordesdeunadistanciade f ,5 -2 metros.<br />

Elmandoadistanciadel cable/deoodificador o Programeelmandoa distanciadel decodificadordecable/sateliteparaquehagafuncionareltelevisocConsulteel<br />

no enciendeniapagaeltelevisorniajustael manualdeldecodificadorde sabldsateliteparaconeoerelc6digodelTV SAMSUNG.<br />

volumen.<br />

:3:3


Inforrnaci©nadicional<br />

Apareceun mensajede "Modono compatible". ,, Compruebelaresolucionqueadmiteeltelevisory ajusteenconsecuenciala resoluci6nde salidadeldispositivo<br />

externo.Oonsultecomoconfigurarlaresolucionen lapagina12de estemanual.<br />

Subtituloen elmen0del televisoraparece o NosepuedeseleccionarSubtitulo Subtituloen elmen_]deltelevisorcuandoestaconectadoatravesde HDMIo<br />

atenuado. Component(pag.22).<br />

SedebeactivarSubtitulo enel dispositivoexterno(pag.22).<br />

Seadvierteun oloraplasticoque provbnedel _ Esteclotesnormaly desaparececoneltbmpo.<br />

televisor.<br />

La Intensidadsepaldeltelevisorno _ Estafunci6ns61oestadisponibben loscanabsdigitabsconlasconexionesdeantena/ RF/ Ooexial(pag.24).<br />

estadisponibbenel menude pruebade<br />

autodiagn6stbo.<br />

Eltelevisorestaindinadohaciaun lade. _ Retirela basedelsoportedetelevisory vuelvaamontarla.<br />

Elmen0delcanalseveatenuado(nodisponibb) _ Elmen0Canals61oestadisponibbcuandoestasebccionadalafuenteTV.<br />

Laconfiguraci6nsepbrdedespuesde 30 o Sieltelevisorestaenel modoDemo comercio, laconfiguraci6ndelaudioy la imagense restabbceracada30<br />

minutoso cadavezqueseapagaeltelevisor, minutos.Cambblaconfiguraci6ndelmodo Demo comercioal modoIJso domiciliario enel procedimbnto<br />

Plug & Play.Pulseel bot6nSOL'ROEparaseleccionarelmode "IV;vayaaMENU-_ Configuracion<br />

Plug & Play-_ ENTER_ (_g. 8).<br />

Perdidaintermitentedeaudioo video. _ Compruebelasconexionesde loscablesy vue_aaconectarlos.<br />

Laperdidadeaudioovideosepuededeberaque loscablessondemasiadorigidoso gruesos.Debeasegurarse<br />

deque loscablesseanIo suficbntementefbxibbs paraun largoperiodode use.Enunmontajemuraldel<br />

televisor,esaconsqabbutilizarcablesconconectoresde 90 grados.<br />

Puedevet pequeflasparticulassimirade cerca _ Estoesunaparticularida del diseflodel productoy noes undefecto.<br />

elhordedelmarcodeltelevisor<br />

Apareceen lapantallaPOP(anunciode r6tulo _ Sebccioneel modoUso domiciliario enel modoPlug & Play.Paraobtenerinformaci6n,consultelafunci6n<br />

internodeltelevisor). Plug & Play(pag.8).<br />

Elpanel LODTFT utiliza un panel que consta de pixebs de [nfimotamaflo que requbren de unatecnolog[aaltamente sofisticada para<br />

su fabrbadon. No obstante, puedeque exbtan unos cuantos pixebs brilhntes u oscurosen la pantalla.Estospixebs no infiuiranen<br />

el rendimientodel aparato.<br />

I Almacenamientoy mantenimiento<br />

4 Espafiol<br />

d


S[S_ TruSurroundHD, SRSand _ symbolare trademarksof SRS Labs, Inc.<br />

TruSurroundHD TruSurroundHD technology is incorporatedunder licensefrom SRSLabs, Inc.<br />

m DOLBY,<br />

D|61TAL ]<br />

Aviso de la licencia del c6digo abierto<br />

Fabricado bajolicenciade DolbyLaboratories.Dolbyy el s[mbolode ladoble D son marcascomerdalesde<br />

Dolby Laboratories.<br />

En elcaso de que se utilice un softwarede codigo abierto,la licenciasobreesteesta disponibleen el meno delproducto.<br />

Elavisode lalicenciadel codigo abiertosolo estadisponibleen ingles.<br />

Resolud6ndepantalla 1920 x 1080<br />

ConsJderacionesmedioambientales<br />

Temperaturade funcionamiento 10°C a 40°C (50°F a 104°F)<br />

Humedaddefuncionamiento 10% a180%, sin condensaoi6n<br />

Temperaturade almacenamiento -20°(} a 45°C (-4°F a 113°F)<br />

Humedaddealmacenamiento _o/<br />

o oa195%, sin condensaci6n<br />

Sopor_egiratorio(izquierda/derecha) -20°- 20°<br />

Tamaflode 3antalla 40 pulgadas<br />

Sonido<br />

(40,0 pulgadas medidas diagonalmente)<br />

/Salida 10 W X 2<br />

DimensJones IAnx Prx AI<br />

CuerDoDnncli_a 38,2 X 3,1 X 23,3 pulgadas<br />

(970,0 X 78,6 X 591,3 ram)<br />

Conel soE_r[e 38,2 X 9,5 X 25,7 pulgadas<br />

(970,0 X 240,0 X 653,0 ram)<br />

Peso<br />

Sinel scoor[e 32.0 Ibs (14.5 kg)<br />

Oonel soporte 38.4 Ibs (17.4 kg)<br />

Eldiseflo y las especificacionespueden cambiar sin previo aviso.<br />

Estedispositivo es un aparatodigital de laClase B.<br />

Paraobtener masinformacionsobre lafuente de alimentaciony el consume de energ[a,consulte la etiqueta adiqeridaal producto.<br />

Espaflol 35


Inforrnad©nadidonal<br />

[] Vista frontal/Vista lateral<br />

[] Detalle del panel de terminales / vista posterior<br />

i® ® ® ® ®i<br />

O<br />

k-e- l<br />

(Unidad:pulgadas)<br />

(Unidad:pulgadas)<br />

NOTA:No todos losdibujosestan necesariamentea escala.Algunasdimensionesestan sujetasa cambio sin previoaviso.Consultelas<br />

dimensionesantes de efectuarlainstalaciondeltelevisor.La empresano se responsabilizade los errorestipograficoso de impresion.<br />

© 2010 SamsungElectronicsAmerica,Inc.<br />

6 Espaflol


A<br />

Actualizaciondel software 24<br />

Ahorro energia 23<br />

Ajusteautomatico I8<br />

Altavozde TV 20<br />

Altavozextemo 20<br />

Antena I4<br />

AUDIOOUT 11<br />

AutodiagnOstico 24<br />

B<br />

Balancede blanco 17<br />

BalanceI/D I9<br />

Boton EAV_CH 7, I4<br />

Boton ON/OFF 7<br />

Brillo 16<br />

C<br />

CambiarCodigo 22<br />

Componente I0<br />

Conexiona un dispositivode audio 11<br />

Conexiona un PC 12<br />

ContrasteDinam. 17<br />

D<br />

Definici0n 16<br />

D GITALAUDO OUT 11<br />

Dinamico 16<br />

D-sub 12<br />

E<br />

Ecualizador I9<br />

Edicionde canales I5<br />

EditarNombre I3<br />

Espaciode instalacion 2<br />

Especificaciones 35<br />

F<br />

Fotos 26<br />

Frecuencia 12<br />

G<br />

Girar 26<br />

N<br />

HDMI 9<br />

Herrambntas 3<br />

HomeTheater 11<br />

I<br />

Idioma 22<br />

ImagenTamaflo 17<br />

Indicadorde encendido 6<br />

L<br />

Licencia 35<br />

Listade Entradas 13<br />

M<br />

Mandoa distancia 7<br />

Media Play 25<br />

Melodia 23<br />

Memorizacionde canales 14<br />

Menude canales 14<br />

Modo de espera 6<br />

Modo pelicula 18<br />

Mono 19<br />

Montajemural 29<br />

Musica 27<br />

Musicade fondo 28<br />

MusicaModo de repetici0n 27<br />

N<br />

Navegar 13<br />

P<br />

Pilas 7<br />

Plug& Play 8<br />

R<br />

Reloj 20<br />

ResolutionOptima 12<br />

S<br />

Secuencia 25<br />

Sebccionar altavoz 20<br />

Sebccionar todo I5<br />

SignalStrength 24<br />

Simbolo 3<br />

Sintonizacionfina 16<br />

Solucionde probbmas 32<br />

Soporte de protecci0n 29<br />

Temporizador 20<br />

Tibio 17<br />

Tono Color 17<br />

Tonodel negro 17<br />

Tono Piel 17<br />

U<br />

UnidadUSB 25<br />

V<br />

VoI.Auto I9<br />

Volumen 6<br />

Espaflo137


Lesfigureset les illustrationsde ce mode d'emploi ne sentfoumies qu'a titre de rderence. L'apparencereelledu produitpourrait_tre<br />

differente.Le designet les specificationsdu produitpeuvent_tre modifiessans preavis.<br />

'_bs Voir le bon de garantb pour avoir plus d'infermation sur les conditions de garantie..<br />

Le format ecran large des ecrans ACL (16:9, soit le rapport hauteur/largeur de I'image) est congu principalement pour les videos plein ecran a ecran<br />

large. Les images affichees devraient 6tre en format ecran large 16:9 ou agrandi afin de remplir I'ecran si votre modeb offre cette caracteristique et que<br />

les images sont constamment en mouvement. L'affichage de graphiques et d'images fixes, comme les barres noires des videos et des programmes de<br />

tel@ision en format standard non agrandi doit 6tre limite au maximum a 5 % du temps d'ecoute hebdomadaire.<br />

De plus, il faut IimiterI'affichage d'images et de textes fixes, comme les rapports boursiers, les affichages de jeux video, les loges des stations, les sites<br />

Web ou les images graphiques et les schemas des ordinateurs, tel qu'indique ci-dessus, et ce pour tousles tel@iseurs. L'affichage d'images fixes qui ne<br />

respecte pas les directivesci-dessus peut causer un vbillissement inegal des ecrans ACL en y creant des images fant6mes subtiles mais permanentes.<br />

Pour @iter ce probBme, faites varbr les emissions et les imageset regarder principalement des images plein ecran en mouvement et non pas des images<br />

ou des barres foncees fixes. Dans les modeles d'ecran a plasma qui offrent des caracterbtiques de format d'image, utiliserces commandes pour obtenir<br />

differents formats en plein @ran.<br />

Prendre garde au choix des formats et a bur duree d'utilbation. Un vbillissement inegal r@ultant du choix et de I'utilbation d'un formal tout comme les<br />

images remanentes, ne sent pas couverts par la garantie Iimiteede Samsung.<br />

• @NONC@DE GARANTIE LIMIT@EDE SAMSUNG ELECTRONICSPOUR L'AM@RIQUEDU NORD<br />

Assujettb aux exigences, conditions, exclusions et limitations de la garantie limiteeoriginab fournie avec les produits de Samsung Electronics<br />

(SAMSUNG)et les exigences, conditions, exclusions et limitations de la presente garantie, SAMSUNG offriraen plus un service de r@aration sous<br />

g,arantb aux @tats-Unispour les produits achet@ au Canada et un service de reparation sous garantie au Canada pour les produits achetes aux<br />

Etats-Unis pendant la periode de garantie precis6e a I'origine et pour I'acheteur initialseubment.<br />

Les r@arations sous garantie decrites ci-dessus doivent 6treeffectuees dans un centre de r@aration agre6SAMSUNG. En plus de la presente<br />

garantb, la garantie limitee originale et une facture datee en tant que preuve d'achat doivent 6tre pr@entees au centre de r@aration. Letransport<br />

de I'appareil au eta partir du centre de r@aration demeure la responsabilit6 de I'acheteur. Les conditions couvertes ne sent Iimitees qu'aux vices de<br />

materiaux et de fabrication dans des conditions d'utilisation normale.<br />

Exclues, mais non pas limitees a, sont les dispositions precis6es a I'origine pour le service _ domicile ou sur place, durees de reparation minimales et<br />

maximabs, echanges ou remplacements, accessoires, options, extensions ou preduits non durables.<br />

Pour obtenir le nom d'un centre de r@aration agre6 Samsung, composez les numeros sans frais suivants :<br />

-Aux @tats-Unis: 1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864)<br />

- Au Canada : 1-800-SAMSUNG<br />

@vitezI'affichage d'images fixes (telles que des fichiers photo jpeg) ou d'el6ments d'image fixes (telsque les loges de canaux, le format d'image 4:3 ou<br />

panorama, barre de ddilement affichant les nouvelbs ou la bourse dans le bas de I'ecran, etc.) a I'ecran. Un affichage constant d'une image fixe peut<br />

causer I'apparition d'images remanentes sur I'ecran ACL ce qui a une incidence sur la qualite de I'image. Afin de reduire le risque que survienne un tel<br />

effet, veuillezsuivre les recommandations suivantes :<br />

• @vitezd'afficher la m6me cha_nependant de Iongues periodes.<br />

Essayez de toujours afficher une I'image en pbin @ran.<br />

Reduire la luminosite et le contraste permet d'eviter I'apparition d'images remanentes.<br />

Utilisez toutes les fonctions de votre tel@iseurconcues pour reduire la remanence d'images et la brOlured'ecran; consultez la section appropriee du<br />

manuel pour obtenir plus de details.<br />

Respectez les distances requises entre le produit et les autres objets (p. ex., bs murs)afin d'assurer une bonne ventilation.<br />

Le non-respect de ces distances pourrait faire augmenter la temperature internedu produit et causer un incendie ou endommager le produit.<br />

'_bs Lorsque vous utilisez un support ou un support mural, utilisezseulement les pieces feurnies par Samsung Electronics.<br />

" Sivous utilisezdes pieces fournies par un autre fabricanl cela pourrait endommager le produit ou causer des blessures engendrees par la chute<br />

du produit.<br />

'_bs L'aspect peut differer selon le produit.<br />

Faites attention Iorsque vous touchez le televiseur,car certaines pieces peuvent 6tre chaudes.<br />

i<br />

i<br />

4 ouces i<br />

Fran_ais<br />

"[4 pouces<br />

! !<br />

It<br />

i<br />

i<br />

',4 ouces<br />

4 pouces<br />

i


Tabledes matieres<br />

• Caract&ristiques ........................................................ 4<br />

• Accessoires .............................................................. 4<br />

• Installation de la base ................................................ 5<br />

• Presentation du panneau de commande ................... 6<br />

• Presentation de la t61ecommande ............................. 7<br />

• Branchement b.une antenne ..................................... 8<br />

• Pr_t b.I'emploi (Mise en marche initiale)..................... 8<br />

• Branchement b.un appareil audiovisuel ..................... 9<br />

• Branchement b.un appareil audio ............................ 11<br />

• Branchement d'un PC ............................................ 12<br />

• Modification de la source d'entree ........................... 13<br />

• Navigation dans les menus ..................................... 13<br />

• Menu des canaux ................................................... 14<br />

Affichagedes canaux 14<br />

Utilisationdes canaux favoris 14<br />

M6morisation des canaux 14<br />

Modification des canaux 15<br />

Autresfoncfions 15<br />

• Menu Image ............................................................ 16<br />

Modification du mode dlmage pr6r6gl6 16<br />

Ajustement des r6glages de I'image 16<br />

Changement des options de I'image 16<br />

Configuration du t616viseuravec un PC 18<br />

• Menu Son ............................................................... 19<br />

Modification du mode Son pr6r6gl6 19<br />

Ajustement des r6glages du son 19<br />

R6glage du son 19<br />

AppuyezsurlatoucheTOOLSde la<br />

tel6commandepourutilisercettefonction.<br />

V6rifiez le symbole!<br />

• Menu de configuration ............................................ 20<br />

R6glage de I'horloge 20<br />

Utilisation de la foncfion de veille 20<br />

R6glage de la raise en marche et de I'arr6t de la<br />

minuterie 20<br />

Exclusion automatique de programmes 21<br />

Autres fonctions 22<br />

Solutions 6conomiques 23<br />

• Menu Soutien technique ......................................... 24<br />

• Media Play .............................................................. 25<br />

Branchement d'un disposifif USB 25<br />

Le menu Media Play 25<br />

• Installation de rensemble de fixation murale ............ 29<br />

• Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington ................... 30<br />

• Stabilisation du t61eviseurpar rapport au tour .......... 31<br />

• Depannage ............................................................. 32<br />

Entreposage et entretien 34<br />

• Licence ................................................................... 35<br />

• Specifications techniques ........................................ 35<br />

• Dimensions ............................................................. 36<br />

• Index ...................................................................... 37<br />

Remarque<br />

Indique des renseignements<br />

supplementaires.<br />

®<br />

Guideetape par etape<br />

Lisezlesinstructionsfiguranta cetendroit<br />

poursavoircommentouvrirlesous-menu<br />

pertinent.<br />

Francais 3


Miseenroute<br />

® Interfacenumeriqueet reseautiquede qualiteexceptionnelb:grace au syntoniseurnumeriqueHD integre,la programmationHD non<br />

payante peut6tre visionneesans cablos61ecteurou recepteursatellite.<br />

® Media Play: Lecturede certainsfichiersmusbaux, photos et filmsenregistressur un dispositifUSB(p. 25).<br />

® Autodiagnostic : Vous pouvezverifiersi b fonctionnement de Hmageet du sonest normal(p.24).<br />

Veillera ce que tous bs el6menetssuivantssobnt indus avec b t61eviseurACL Sides el6mentssont manquants,communiquez avec<br />

le detaillant.<br />

Laforme et la couleur des articlespeuvent varierselon le modele.<br />

Frangab


Reportez-vous auguide s@are pour I'installation dusupport.<br />

Suivezles etapes ci-dessouspour fixerletel6viseura la base.<br />

Fixezle guide de la basesur la basea I'aide desquatrevis (M4 X LI 2), telqu'illustre.<br />

ou (M4XL12)<br />

v!<br />

•- - Vis (M4 X L12)<br />

2. Fixezle tel6viseursur la baseen la maintenanta laverticale,tel 3. Resserrezlesdeuxvis (M4 X L12)a la position O, puis<br />

qu'illustre, resserrezles deuxvis (M4X LI 2)a laposition 0.<br />

REMARQUE<br />

* Assurez-vousde bien distinguerle devant et I'arrierede la baseet du guide de celle-ci a I'assemblage.<br />

, Assurez-vousqu'au moins deux personnessoulevent et d@lacent letel6viseur.<br />

" Placez I'appareila la verticale, puis serrezles vis. Sivous vissezles vis Iorsquele t61eviseurest en position hodzontale,il pourrait<br />

penchervers un cOte.<br />

Francais 5


Miseenroute<br />

Lacouleur et la forme du produit peuventvarieren fonctiondu modele.<br />

Haut-parleurs<br />

CaDTeurde Telecommanae<br />

SOURCE<br />

MENL<br />

--VOL+<br />

VCHA<br />

Mode veiiie<br />

-alcateur aaumental:lor<br />

(b Alirnentation/<br />

Capteur de toBcommande<br />

F- SOURCE_ MENU<br />

OrienterlateBcommandeversb capteur sur leteBviseur.<br />

-- VOL +<br />

Indicateurd'alimentation<br />

v OH A J q'_ I<br />

v I<br />

Permetde passerd'une source d'entree a Fautre.Danslemenu a I'ecran,cette touche a la<br />

mOmefonctionque la touche ENTERIZ_ de lateBcommande.<br />

Afficheb menua Fecran,OSD(OnScreenDisplay),desfonctions de votre teBviseur.<br />

Permetde reglerb volume. Dansb menu a Fecran,utilisezlestouches - VOL + de lamOme<br />

maniereque bs touches _1et I_ de lateBcommande.<br />

Changede canal.Dartsle menua I'ecran,utilisezles touches V ¢H _ de la mOmemanBre<br />

que lestouches T et A de lateBcommande.<br />

Clignotepuiss'arrOteIorsqueleteBviseurest allume.S'allumeen mode de veille.<br />

Appuyer sur cettetouche pour mettre b teBviseursous tensionou horstension.<br />

Ne laissezpar votreteBviseuren moded'attente durant de Ionguesperiodes (Iorsquevous partezen vacances,par exemple).Unepetite<br />

quantited'eiectricite estconsommee m6meIorsqueleteBviseurest eteint. IIest conseilBde debrancherlecordon d'alimentation.<br />

Fran_ais


Permetde mettre le t61eviseursous<br />

tension et hors tension.<br />

Appuyez pour acceder directement<br />

un canal<br />

Appuyezsur cette touche pour s61ectionner<br />

des canauxsuppl6mentaires(num6riques)<br />

diffus6spar unem6me station.Par<br />

exemple,pour choisirle canal54-3,<br />

appuyersur 54, puis sur- et sur 3.<br />

Permet de regler levolume.<br />

Affiche le menu OSD.<br />

Affiche Media Play (USB) (p. 25).<br />

Selectionne rapidement les fonctions<br />

frequemment utilisees.<br />

Permet de retourner au menu prec6dent.<br />

Touches du menu Liste des canaux,<br />

Media Play (USB), etc.<br />

Insertion des piles (piles AAA)<br />

z<br />

2<br />

REMARQUE<br />

Affiche et s61ectionneles sources video<br />

disponibles (p. 13).<br />

Permet d'ecouter le canal prgcedent,<br />

Coupe temporairement le son.<br />

Change de canal.<br />

Affiche la Iiste de vos canaux a 1'6cran<br />

(p. 14).<br />

Affiche la liste de vos canaux favoris<br />

I'ecran (p. 14).<br />

Affiche I'information a I'ecran.<br />

Selectionne les options de menu<br />

I'ecran et modifie les valeursaffichees.<br />

Quitte le menu.<br />

MTS: Appuyez sur cette touche pour<br />

choisir entre les modes st6reo, mono<br />

ou diffusion SAP (seconde piste audio)<br />

(p. 19).<br />

RSIZE: %lectionne le format de I'image<br />

(p. 17).<br />

CC: Permet de reglerla fonction de<br />

sous-titrage (p. 22).<br />

* Utilisezla tel6commandea une distance maximaledu televiseurd'environ<br />

7m,<br />

* Une lumierevive peut entraverle bon fonctionnement de la telecommande,<br />

Evitezde I'utiliserpres d'une source lurnineusefluorescenteou une<br />

enseigneau neon.<br />

* Lacouleur et la forme peuventvader en fonction du modele.<br />

Francais 7


Miseenroute<br />

Au momentde lapremBre miseen marchedu teBviseur,bs reglagesde bases'effectuentautomatiquement.<br />

Branchementdu cordon d'alimentation et de I'antenne.<br />

Uneseriede messagess'afficheraa I'ecranpour vousassisterpour laconfigurationdes reglagesde baselotsde lamisesous tensioninitiabde<br />

votreteBviseur.Appuyezsurla touche POWER(b. LafonctionPr_t a I'emploi n'est disponibbque Iorsquela sourceEntreeest regBea TV.<br />

Appuyezsur la touche rouge pour revenira I'etapepr@edente.<br />

%<br />

Sebctionnezlalangue d'affichagea I'ecrandesiree. S|_<br />

Selectionae la langue Appuyezsur la touche A ou _', pub sur la touche ENTERI_. POWER<br />

Selectionau moae Appuyezsur la touche _ ou _, pub sur la touche ENTERIZ_.<br />

Demo magasJnc_ • Sebctionnezle mode Util. a domicile. Le mode Demo magasin<br />

Util. a domicile ne dolt 6tre utilisequ'en magasin.<br />

Choixd'une antenne<br />

• Revenirau mode Util. a domicile a pa_ir du modeDemo magasin<br />

(standard): appuyezsur la touche de volumedu teBviseur.Lorsque<br />

le reglagedu volumeest affichea recran, appuyezsur la touche<br />

MENU du teBviseurpendant5 secondes.<br />

Appuyezsur la touche A ou _', pub sur la touche ENTERI_. SebctionnezAir, C_ble ou Auto.<br />

Cholxdun cana Appuyezsur la touche A ou _', pub sur la touche ENTERE_. Sebctionnezlasource d'antenne<br />

a memonser.Lorsquevous regbz lasource d'antennea Cable, vous pouvezegabmentregler bs<br />

/aleutsnumeriques(frequencedescanaux)auxcanaux. Pourplus de details,reportez-vousa la<br />

sectionChaine_ Prog. auto (p.14).<br />

Appuyezsur EI/TERL_ a n'importe quel moment pour interromprelamemorisation des<br />

canaux.<br />

Reglageau Mode horloge Regleb Mode horloge manuelbmentou automatiquement.<br />

• Auto: Vous permetde sebctionner b mode H. d'ete (heureavancee)ainsique b fuseauhoraire.<br />

,, Manuel: Vous permet de reglermanuelbmentI'heureet ladate actuelbs (p.20).<br />

Afllcnagedu Guide de Methodede branchementvous assurantque lameilburequalite HD s'affiche.<br />

connexion HD<br />

Enmode d ffusion, Appuyezsur la touche ENTERI_.<br />

Si vous souhaitez reinitialiser ce parametre...<br />

(_ MENUrm _ Configuration _ Pr_t a I'emploi _ ENTER[_<br />

Fran_ais


Branchements<br />

Utilisation d'un c&ble HDMI ou HDMI/DVi : Branchement HD (jusqu'a 1080p)<br />

Nous recommandonsI'utilisationde laconnexion HDMIpour obtenir uneimage HD de qualiteoptimab,<br />

Appareilsdisponibles:lecteur DVD,lecteurBlu-ray,cablos61ecteurou un recepteursatellite(boRierdecodeur)HD<br />

HDMI (DVl} IN / DVlAUDIO IN<br />

" II faut utiliserla prised'entree HDMI (DVl} IN pour levideo dans le cas d'un branchementau cable HDMI/DVI,Un lecteur<br />

DVD,lecteur Blu-ray, cablos61ecteurou un r@epteursatellite (bottlerdecodeur)HD peut necessiterun cable DVI-HDMI(de<br />

DVlvers HDMI)ou un adaptateurDVI-HDMI(de DVlvers HDMI),Une prise DV AUDIO [I'4est necessairepour I'audio.<br />

" II est possible que I'imagesoit anormale(s'ily a une image)ou que leson ne fonctionne passi un appareil exteme utilisant<br />

une ancienneversiondu mode HDMI est brancheau teBviseur.Si un tel probBme survient, renseignez-voussur laversion<br />

HDMI aupresdu fabricant de I'appareilexteme et, si elletrop ancienne,demandez une raisea niveau.<br />

" Wrifiez que vous achetez un cable HDMI certi%. Sinon, I'imagerisque de ne pas s'afficherou une erreurde connexion<br />

peut survenir,<br />

...... ,%<br />

Francais 9


Branchements<br />

Utilisation d'un c&ble composante (jusqu'a 1080p) ou audio/video (480iseulement)<br />

Appareilsdisponibbs:, bcteur de DVD, bcteur Biu-ray,c_blos61ecteuret recepteursatellite,magnetoscope<br />

Connexion avec c&ble EX-Link<br />

Appareilsdisponibbs : appareilsextemescompatiblesavec EX-Link.<br />

0 Fran_ais<br />

EX-L{ItK: Oonnecteurutilisea desfins de r@arationseubment.


Utilisation d'un c&ble optique (numerique)<br />

Appareilsdisponibles:cha_neaudio numerique,amplificateur,cinemamaisona DVD<br />

DIG TAL AUDO OUT (OPT CAL}<br />

* Lorsqu'unechaine audio numeriqueest brancheea la priseDIGITALAUDIO OUT (OPTICAL},reduisezlevolume du<br />

teBviseuret de la cha]ne,<br />

* Le son en 5,1 canauxest possibleIorsquele teBviseurest raccordea un appareil exteme dote de cette fonction audio,<br />

* Lorsque lerecepteur (amplificateurou lecteur de DVDde la chainede cinemamaison)est active,il est possibled'entendre<br />

le son provenantde la priseoptique du teBviseur. LorsqueleteBviseur regoitdes signaux numeriques,il transmet leson<br />

en 5,I canauxa I'amplificateurou lecteurde DVDde lachaine de cinema maison. Lorsquelasource est un composant<br />

numerique, comme un lecteur DVD/Blu-ray,un c_blos61ecteurou un recepteur satellite(boitierdecodeur),et que ce dernier<br />

est brancheau teBviseura I'aided'un c_ble HDMI,I'amplificateurou lecteur de DVDde lacha]ne de cinema maison nefera<br />

entendrequ'un son en deuxcanaux. Pour entendre leson en 5,I canaux, branchezdirectement laprise DigitalAudio Out<br />

du lecteur DVD/Blu-ray,c_blos61ecteurou recepteursatellitea un amplificateurou une chainede cinema maison,<br />

Frao iia,s


Branchements<br />

_, I'aide d'un c&ble HDMI/DVl ou c_bie D-sub<br />

Modes d'affichage (Entree D-Sub et HDMI/DVi)<br />

La resolutionoptimaleest I920 x 1080 a 60 Hz.<br />

IBM<br />

MAC<br />

VESA CVT<br />

VESA DMT<br />

VESA GTF<br />

VESA DMT / DTV CEA<br />

REMARQUE<br />

640 x 850<br />

720 x 400<br />

640 x 480<br />

832 x 624<br />

1152 x 870<br />

720 x 576<br />

1152 x 864<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 960<br />

640 x 480<br />

640 x 480<br />

640 x 480<br />

800 x 600<br />

800 x 600<br />

800 x 600<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1024 x 768<br />

1152 x 864<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 800<br />

1280 x 800<br />

1280 x 960<br />

1360 x 768<br />

1440 x 900<br />

1440 x 900<br />

1680 x 1050<br />

1280 x 720<br />

1280 x 1024<br />

1920 x 1080p<br />

31.469<br />

31.469<br />

35.000<br />

49.726<br />

68.681<br />

35.910<br />

53.783<br />

56.456<br />

75.231<br />

31.469<br />

37.861<br />

37.500<br />

37.879<br />

48.077<br />

46.875<br />

48.363<br />

56.476<br />

60.023<br />

67.500<br />

63.981<br />

79.976<br />

45.000<br />

49.702<br />

62.795<br />

60.000<br />

47.712<br />

55.935<br />

70.635<br />

65.290<br />

52.500<br />

74.620<br />

67.500<br />

70.086<br />

70.087<br />

66.667<br />

74.551<br />

75.062<br />

59.950<br />

59.959<br />

74.777<br />

74.857<br />

59.940<br />

72.809<br />

75.000<br />

60.317<br />

72.188<br />

75.000<br />

60.004<br />

70.069<br />

75.029<br />

75.000<br />

60.020<br />

75.025<br />

60.000<br />

59.810<br />

74.934<br />

60.000<br />

60.015<br />

59.887<br />

74.984<br />

59.954<br />

70.000<br />

70.000<br />

60.000<br />

* IIfaut utiliserlaprise d'entree HDM_(DVI)IN dans le cas d'un branchement au c&bleHDMI/DVI.<br />

* Le mode interface n'est paspris en charge.<br />

* Le t61eviseurpeut fonctionner de facon anormalesi un format video non standardest selectionn&<br />

25.175<br />

28.322<br />

30.240<br />

57.284<br />

100.000<br />

32.750<br />

81.750<br />

95.750<br />

130.000<br />

25.175<br />

31.500<br />

31.500<br />

40.000<br />

50.000<br />

49.500<br />

65.000<br />

75.000<br />

78.750<br />

108.000<br />

108.000<br />

135.000<br />

74.250<br />

83.500<br />

106.500<br />

108.000<br />

85.500<br />

106.500<br />

136.750<br />

146.250<br />

89.040<br />

128.943<br />

148.500<br />

* Lesmodes s@are et composesont pris en charge. Le mode SOG(Sync OnGreen) n'est paspris en charge.<br />

2 Fran_ais<br />

+/_<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

+/+<br />

+/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

_/+<br />

+/+


Liste source<br />

Selectionnerle teBviseurou une autre source SOURCE<br />

d'entree exteme comme un bcteur DVD/Blu-ray,<br />

c_blos61ecteurou recepteursatellite.<br />

MENUITrl _ Entree_ Liste source<br />

ENTER %<br />

[] TV / AV/ Component / PC / HDMI/DVl<br />

Seub bs appareib externesbranches au teBviseur<br />

peuvent 6tre sebctionn6s. Dansla Liste source, bs<br />

entreesbranchees sont en surbrillance.<br />

[:option PC est toujours activeedans la Liste source,<br />

Fonctionsde base<br />

Avantd'utiliser b tei6viseur,suivezies etapesci-dessouspour<br />

apprendrecomment naviguerdans bs menuset selectionneret<br />

ajusterdifferentesfonctions,<br />

o 11<br />

@<br />

O ToucheMENU : Affichelemenu a I'ecran principal.<br />

O ENTER_ / touche de direction: Permetde d@lacerle<br />

curseuret selectionnerun eBment. Conflrmele reglage,<br />

O ToucheRETURN: Permetde retournerau menuprec6dent.<br />

O ToucheEXT : Quittele menude I'ecran,<br />

Entrer le nom<br />

MENUITrl _ Entree _ Entrer le nom _ ENTER<br />

Magnetoscope / DVD/ C&ble STB / Satellite STB /<br />

PVR STB/ Recepteur A/V / Jeu / Camescope / PC /<br />

DVl PC / DVl/ TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD/ DMA: Entrez<br />

I'appareilconnecteaux prisesd'entree pour faciliterlaselection<br />

de lasource d'entree,<br />

Lorsqu'un PC de resolutionde I920 x I080 a 60 Hzest<br />

branche au port HDMI (DVl) IN, reglez laconnexion<br />

DVl PC dansle menu Entrer le nom.<br />

Lorsqu'un c_ble HDMI/DVIest brancheau port d'entree<br />

RDM (DV) IN, vous devezregler le teBviseursur le mode<br />

DVl PC ou DVl dans le menuEntrer le nora<br />

Utilisation de I'affichage &I'ecran OSD (OnScreen Display)<br />

La methoded'acces varieen fonctiondu menuselectionn&<br />

_: ;;;MENUFm<br />

V ZA<br />

Lesoptionsdu menuprincipal<br />

apparaissent:<br />

Image, Son, Chaine, Configuration,<br />

Entree,Application,<br />

Support technique.<br />

SelectionnezuneicOnea I'aidede la<br />

touche A ou T,<br />

ENTER E_ Appuyezsur ENTER_ pour acceder<br />

ausous-m÷nu.<br />

S6 ect onnez sou.menu vou u<br />

I'aidede la touche A ou T.<br />

Appuyezsur la touche _ ou I_ pour<br />

OumenuO s v*urd'une lectionn*'a option. Ovar,een Rer ,age on<br />

ENTERE_ Appuyezsur la touche ENTER_ pour<br />

confirmerlasebction.<br />

EXIT-,IJ Appuyezsur la touche EXT.<br />

Frangais 13


Fonctionsde base<br />

Affichage des canaux<br />

Liste des canaux<br />

Ajoutez,supprimezou ddinbsez vos canauxfavoriset<br />

utilisezb teB-horairedesdiffusionsnumeriques, _,_.j<br />

(_ MENUrlTt _ Oha_ne_ Liste des oanaux _ __,,_[ t ,-,_<br />

ENTER_ _ }<br />

Selecdonnezuncanal clansla IisteTous ies canaux, _ I<br />

Oanaux ajoutes, Favori ou Enregistrement par<br />

minuterie en appuyant sur lestouches A / T et<br />

ENTERE_, Vouspouvezalorsvisionnerlecanal selectionn6.<br />

[] _B Tousies canaux : Affichetousles canauxactuelbment<br />

accessibbs,<br />

[] _Canaux ajoutes : Affichetous bs canauxajoutes.<br />

[] _ Favori : Affichetousles canauxfavorb,<br />

[] _ Enregistrement par minuterie : Affichagede toutes les<br />

emissionsreserv6es.<br />

Utilbationdes touchesde couleur avec la Liste des canaux<br />

" [3 Verte(Zoom): Agrandit ou rapetbse un numerode<br />

canal.<br />

" ::: Jaune (Selectionner) : Sebctionne plusburs Ibtes de<br />

canaux.Sebctionnez les canauxdesir6s,Appuyez ensuite<br />

sur la touche jaune pour regbr simultanementtous bs<br />

canaux choisb. Le symbole _/s'affiche a lagauche des<br />

canaux choisb.<br />

" _-_ (Outiis) : Affiche b menud'options Liste des canaux.<br />

(Lesmenus d'options peuventdifferer selon la situation.)<br />

ic6nes d'affichage de statut des canaux<br />

i_<br />

_/ Un canal selectionne,<br />

V Un canal ddini en tant que favori,<br />

(_) Une emissionresep/ee.<br />

4 Fran_ais<br />

Utilisation des canauxfavoris<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Ohafne _ Liste des canaux _ ENTERE]}_<br />

aux favoris / Effacer des favoris<br />

Ddinircomme favorisbs canauxque vous regardezfrequemment.<br />

1. Sebcdonnez un canalet appuyezsur la touche TOOLS,<br />

2. Ajouterou supprimer un canala partir desmenus<br />

Ajouter aux favoris ou Effacer desfavoris.<br />

Pouraffichertousles canauxFavoris,diquez sur<br />

boutonillustrea droite,<br />

M_morisationdes canaux<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Ohafne_ ENTERI_<br />

Antenne (Air / C&b!e)........................................<br />

Avant quevotre teBviseurne puissecommencera memoriserles<br />

canauxdisponibbs, vous devezspedfier le typede lasource de<br />

signalbrancheeau teBviseur(c'est-a-direuneAir ou le O_bie).<br />

Prog. auto<br />

[] Air : Signald'antennede typeair,<br />

[] O&bie : Signald'antennede type c_bb,<br />

[] Auto : Signauxd'antennede typeAir et C_bb,


REMARQUE<br />

* Aumoment delaselection dusysteme detel6vision<br />

parc_ble: STD, HRCetIRCdesignent differents<br />

systemes dec_blodistribution. Oommuniquez avec votre<br />

c_blodistributeur pour determiner lesysteme dec_ble<br />

devotre region, Laselection delasource designal est<br />

maintenant terminee.<br />

* Unefoistousles canaux memoris6s, leteleviseur<br />

commence aeliminer lescanaux brouilles, Puis lemenu<br />

Prog. autos'affiche denouveau.<br />

Modification des canaux<br />

(_ MENU[[]] _ Chafne _ Liste des canaux _ ENTERI]_<br />

Modifier le nom du canal<br />

1. Selectionnezun canal et appuyezsur latouche TOOLS.<br />

2. Modiflez lenora du canal a partirdu menu<br />

Modifier le nom du canal.<br />

[] Modifier le nom du canal (canauxanalogiquesseulement):<br />

assignezun nora personnaliseau canal,<br />

Autres fonctions<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Chafne _ ENTERI]_<br />

Effacer les canaux brouill_s<br />

Cette fonctionpermet d'eliminerles canauxbrouillesapresla<br />

programmationautomatique.Cette procedurepeut prendrede 20<br />

30 minutes,<br />

Arr6ter la recherche de canaux brouilles.<br />

1. Appuyezsur ENTER[]_ pour selectionnerArr_t,<br />

2. Appuyezsur latouche _1pour selectionnerOui.<br />

3. Appuyezsur latouche ENTER[]_,<br />

Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'en mode C&ble.<br />

Liste des canaux<br />

(_ MENU[[]] _ Chafne _ Liste des canaux _ ENTERI]_<br />

Liste des canaux Menu d'options<br />

R%lez chaquecanal a I'aidedes options du menu Listede canaux<br />

(Ajouter / Supprimer, Ecoute minut., Choisir tout /<br />

Deselect. Tout), Lesoptionsdu menupeuventvarierselonle statut<br />

du canal,<br />

1. Selectionnezun canal et appuyezsur latouche TOOLS.<br />

2. Choisissezune fonctionet modifiezles parametres,<br />

[] Ajouter / Supprimer: Ajoutezou de supprimezun canal afin<br />

d'afficherseulementles canauxdesir6s,<br />

[]<br />

[]<br />

REMARQUE<br />

Tousles canaux supprimessont affiches dans le<br />

menuTous les canaux,<br />

* Un canal affiche en gris indiqueque celui-ci a ete<br />

supprim&<br />

* Le menuAjouter ne s'afficheque pour les canaux<br />

supprimes,<br />

* IIest egalement possiblede supprimer un canal du<br />

menu Canaux ajoutes ou Favori.<br />

I_coute minut. : Vous pouvezfaireafficherautomatiquement<br />

un canal a I'heurevoulue.Vous dwez reglerI'horlogeavant<br />

d'utilisercette fonction.<br />

1. Appuyer sur la touche _1/ _. / A / _' pour choisirlecanal<br />

voulu dansla Liste des canaux,<br />

2. Appuyezsur latouche TOOLS puis selectionnez<br />

Ecoute minut.,<br />

3. Faitesddiler versle hautou lebas pour ajuster les<br />

reglagesdans labo_teou appuyezsur les touches<br />

numeriquesde latel6commandespour entrerladate et<br />

I'heure,<br />

Sivous selectionnez Une lois, Hebdomadaire ou<br />

Quotld. dans Repeter, vous pouvezentrerla date<br />

que vous voulez,<br />

4. SelectionnezOK, puis appuyezsur latouche ENTER[]_<br />

unelois terrain&<br />

REMARQUE<br />

" Seulsles canaux m#morisespeuvent_tre reserves.<br />

" Lesemissions reserveess'afficherontdans le menu<br />

Enregistrement par minuterie.<br />

. Lorsqu'un canal num#riqueest selectionne,appuyez<br />

sur la touche I_ pour regarder I'emissionnumerique,<br />

Choisir tout : S#lectionnetousles canauxdansla Ilstedes<br />

canaux,<br />

Deselect. Tout : Deselectionnetousles canauxselectionnes.<br />

Uoption Deselect. Tout ne peut _tre choisie que<br />

Iorsqu'un canal ou plus est selectionn&<br />

¢ Enregistrement Par mi nuterie .......................................<br />

(dartsla Liste des canaux)<br />

Vous pouvezregarder,modifierou supprimeruneemissionreservee<br />

pour I'ecoute.L'optionEnregistrement par minuterie s'afficheici,<br />

Selectionnezun programmeet appuyezsur la touche TOOLS pour<br />

afficherles options,<br />

[] Information, modification : Modifieuneemissionreservee<br />

pour I'ecoute.Commencezpar I'etape 3 de I',,Ecouteminut.>,<br />

ci-dessus,<br />

Annuler horaires : Annuleune emissionreserveepour<br />

I'ecoute.<br />

Oette fonction permet de supprimer le ou les<br />

programmesselectionnes ou mis en surbrillance,<br />

Francais 15


Fonctionsde base<br />

[] Information : Afficheune emissionreserv6epour I'ecoute.<br />

(11est egalementpossiblede modifierI'informationrelative<br />

une emission.)<br />

IIest possible de visualiserI'informationen selectionnant<br />

un programmeet en appuyant sur la touche ENTERIC.<br />

[] Choisir Tout / Deselect. Tout : Selectionneou des61ectionne<br />

tousles programmesreserv6s.<br />

Syn. Pr@ise<br />

(canauxanalogiquesseulement)<br />

Si lareceptionest bonne,aucun reglagemanueln'est necessaire;<br />

bs reglagessont effectuesautomatiquementdurant la recherche<br />

et lamemorisation.Silesignald'un canal estfaibb ou de mauvaise<br />

qualite,effectuezun reglagemanuel.FaResddiler a gaucheou<br />

droitejusqu'a ce que I'imagesoit claire.<br />

Mode<br />

Lesparametressontappliques au canalell cours de diffusion.<br />

Lescanauxsyntonises memoris6ssont marquesd'un<br />

asterisque,, * >,a droite de bur numero, clansla zone<br />

d'affichage des canaux.<br />

Pourretablir lasyntonisationde pr@ision,sebctionnez<br />

Regler.<br />

Modification du mode d'image pr_r_gl_<br />

MENUrITI -_ Image-_ Mode-_ ENTERC_<br />

Selectionnezle typed'image quevous prderez.<br />

[] Dynamique : Oonvientaux piecesclaires.<br />

[] Standard : Oonvientaux environnementnormaux.<br />

[] Cinema : Pour regarderdesfilmsdans une piecesombre.<br />

6 Fran_ais<br />

Ajustement des r_glages de I'image<br />

Contre-jour / Contraste / Luminosit6 / Nettet6<br />

/ Couleur / Teinte (V/R)<br />

MENUrlTI _ Image_ ENTERI_<br />

Votretel6viseurest dote d'options de reglagequi vous permettent<br />

de reglerlaqualitede I'image.<br />

REMARQUE<br />

* Lorsquevous apportez des modificationsaux options<br />

Contre-jour, Contraste, Luminosite, Nettete, Couleur<br />

ou Teinte (V/R),I'images'ajuste en consequence.<br />

* En mode PC,il est possiblede modifier uniquementles<br />

fonctions Contre-jour, Contraste et Luminosit&<br />

* Ces reglagespeuvent 6tre ajusteset conserves pour<br />

chaque appareil externebrancheau tel6viseun<br />

Changement des options de I'image<br />

R_g!agesavanc6s .................................................................<br />

MENUrlTl _ Image _ Reglages avances _ ENTERI_<br />

(L'option Reglagesavaricesestdisponibleen mode Standard /<br />

Cinema)<br />

Le nouveautel6viseurSamsungpermet d'effectuerdesreglages<br />

d'imageencore plus precisque les modelesprec6dents.<br />

En mode PC, il est possible de modifieruniquement les<br />

fonctions Contraste dynam., Gamma et<br />

I_quilibrage du blanc.


[] Tonalite noire (Off<br />

/ Fonce/ Plus fonce / Le plus fonce) :<br />

Choisissezle niveaude noir a I'ecran pour reglerla profondeur<br />

de ce demier.<br />

[] Contraste dynam. (Off / Basse/ Moyen / Haute) : Reglele<br />

contraste de Hmage.<br />

[] Gamma: RegleI'intensitede lacouleur primaire.<br />

[] Espace couleur (Auto / Standard) : Reglelagammede<br />

couleursdisponiblespour creer I'image.<br />

[] I_quilibragedu blanc : Reglela temperaturede la couleur pour<br />

une image plus naturelle.<br />

Decal.-R/ Decal.-V / Decal.-B : Reglela profondeurde<br />

chaque couleur(rouge,vert, bleu).<br />

Gain-R / Gain-V / Gain-B : Reglela luminositede chaque<br />

couleur (rouge,vert, bleu).<br />

Regler: Retablittousles reglages#quilibrage du blanc aux<br />

reglagespar ddaut.<br />

[] Ton chair : Rehaussele,, ton chair,, (rose)de Hmage.<br />

[] Amelioration des bords (Off / On) : Soulignele contourdes<br />

objets.<br />

* Apres avoirselectionneZoom1, Zoom2 ou Format large:<br />

Options d,image ......................................................................................<br />

1. Appuyezsur latouche i_ pour selectionnerPosition,<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Image _ Options d'image _ ENTERI_<br />

2. Appuyezsur latouche ENTEREd.<br />

Enmode PC, il est possible de modifier uniquementles<br />

fonctions Nuance Ooul. et Taille.<br />

[] Nuance Coul. (Froide/ Normal / Chaudel / Chaude2)<br />

Chaudel ou Chaude2 se desactiventIorsquele mode<br />

d'image est Dynamique et Standard.<br />

Ces reglages peuvent_tre ajusteset conserves pour<br />

chaque appareil externebrancheau televiseur.<br />

Taille: Votrec&blos61ecteurou recepteur<br />

satellitepeut egalementdisposerde ses<br />

proprestaillesd'ecran. Toutefois,nousvous<br />

recommandonsd'utiliserle mode 16:9 h<br />

plupart du temps.<br />

16:9 : Pour reglerI'imageen mode I6:9.<br />

Zoom1 : Pour un agrandissementmoder&<br />

Zoom2 : Pour un plus grand agrandissement.<br />

Format large : Augmentelefacteur de forme de I'imagepour<br />

qu'elle remplisseI'ecranen entier.<br />

%sponible pour le signalHD 1080i/720p en mode I6:9<br />

4:3 : PourreglerHmageen mode 4:3.<br />

Ne pas utiliserle format d'image 4:3 pendant de Iongues<br />

periodes. Les bordures a gauche, a droite et au centre<br />

de I'ecranpeuvent hisser des traces a cause de la<br />

retentiond'image sur I'ecranqui n'est pascouvert par<br />

la garantie.<br />

Plein ecran : AfficheHmageentierenon tronqueelots<br />

d'une entreede signaux HDMI(720p / I080i/1080p) ou<br />

composante(1080i/ 108Op).<br />

REMARQUE<br />

3. Appuyezsur latouche A ou T pour deplacerHmage<br />

versle hautou le bas.<br />

4. Appuyezsur latouche ENTERIng.<br />

5. Appuyezsur latouche _ pour selectionnerRegl..<br />

6. Appuyezsur latouche ENTERI_ pour replacer<br />

Hmagea sa position par defaut.<br />

Francais 17


Fonctionsde base<br />

[]<br />

" ApresavoirselectionnePlein ecran en mode HDMI<br />

(I080i/I080p) ou Composante (I080i/1080p),il est<br />

possibleque vous deviezcentrer I'image:<br />

1. Appuyezsur latouche _ ou I_ pour selectionner<br />

Position.<br />

2. Appuyezsur latouche ENTERI_.<br />

3. Appuyersur latouche A, _', _! ou _, pour d@lacer<br />

I'image.<br />

4. Appuyezsur latouche ENTERE_.<br />

5. Appuyezsur latouche _ ou I_ pour sebctionner<br />

Regl..<br />

6. Appuyezsur latouche ENTERI_.<br />

" HD (Hauteddinition) : I6:9- 1080i/1080p (I920x1080),<br />

720p (1280x720)<br />

" Lesreglages peuvent 6tre ddinis et memorisespour<br />

chacun desappareilsexternes branches a une entree sur<br />

leteBviseur.<br />

ATV,AV,Oomposante(480i, 16:9,Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3<br />

480p)<br />

DTV(10801),Composante 16:9, 4:3, Format large,<br />

(I080i, I080p), HDMI(720p, Piein ecran<br />

I080i, 1080p)<br />

PC 16:9, 4:3<br />

Digital NR (Off/ Basse / Moyen / Haute / Auto): Si lesignal<br />

de diffusion capte par leteBviseurest faibb, il est possible<br />

d'activer la fonctionde Digital NR pour aidera eliminerbs<br />

parasiteset les imagesremanentesqui apparaissenta I'ecran,<br />

Lorsquelesignalest faibb, selectionnezune des autres<br />

options jusqu'a ce que lameilbure image soit affichee,<br />

8 Frangais<br />

Nv nr HDMI (Normal / Basse) : Choisitle niveaude noir<br />

I'ecran pour reglerla profondeurde ce dernier.<br />

Disponibleseulementen mode HDMI,<br />

Mode Film (Off / Auto) : Le teBviseurdetecte et traite<br />

automatiquementbs signaux de film provenantde toutes les<br />

sourceset regleI'imagepour obtenirune ddinition optimale,<br />

Disponibleavec les modes TV,AV,COMPOSANTE<br />

(480i/1080i) et HDMI(480i/1080i),<br />

R6initialisation de !Image (OK / Annu!er) ............................<br />

Retablitle moded'image couranta ses reglagespar defaut,<br />

Configuration du t_l@iseur avec un PC<br />

Reglelasource d'entree a PC.<br />

MENUITrl _ Image_ ENTERE_<br />

R6glage Auto ..........................................................................<br />

Regleautomatiquementbs parametres,bs frequenceset bs<br />

positions,<br />

Oette fonction n'est pas disponible Iorsqu'unc_ble HDMI/DVl<br />

est branch&<br />

I_cran<br />

[] Grain / Affine : @limineou reduitbs parasites,Si le bruit<br />

n'est paselimineen effectuantuniquementun reglageprecis,<br />

reglez lafrequencele mieuxpossible(Grain),pub procedez<br />

une syntonisationde nouveau,Une lois les parasitesreduits,<br />

reajustezI'imagepour la centrersur I'ecran.<br />

[] PC Position : Reglerlaposition de I'ecrande I'ordinateurs'il<br />

ne correspond pasa celuidu teBviseur.Appuyezsur la touche<br />

A ou T pour reglerla position verticab,Appuyezsur la touche<br />

_! ou _, pour reglerla position horizontab.<br />

[] Retablir I"image : RetablitI'imageen fonctiondes reglages<br />

par ddaut,


Utilisation du televiseur comme ecran PC<br />

Configurationdu Iogicielsur votre PC(sousWindows XP)<br />

Selon laversionde Windowset lacarte video, Bsecrans affiches<br />

peuventdifferer,mais les m6mes renseignementsde configuration<br />

de bases'ap@quentdans laplupartdes cas. (@non,communiquez<br />

avec lefaMcant de I'ordinateurou votre d@@llantSamsung.)<br />

1. Cliquezsur ,


Fonctionsde base<br />

S_lect. le haut-parleur (Haut-p. externe /<br />

Reglage Horloge : Reglezles options Mois, Jour,Annee,<br />

Heure, Minute et am/pm manuellement.<br />

Haut-par!eur TV)..........................................................................................................................................................<br />

Cette fonction n'est disponible que Iorsquela fonction<br />

Vous pourriezentendreun echodu soil en raison d'une difference<br />

Mode horloge est regleea Manuel.<br />

de vitessede decodagedu haut-parleurprincipalet du recepteur<br />

Vous pouvez reglerdirectement les valeursMois, Jour,<br />

audio. Sic'est lecas, reglezletel6viseura Haut-p. exteme.<br />

Annee, Heure ou Minute en appuyant sur les touches<br />

numeriquesde la tel6commande.<br />

LorsqueI'optionSelect. le haut-parleur est r6glee<br />

Haut-p. externe, les touches de volume et MUTE ne<br />

fonctionneront paset les reglagesdu son seront limites.<br />

Lorsquelafonction Select. le haut-parleur est r6glee<br />

Haut-p. externe.<br />

" Haut-parieur TV: Off, Haut-p. externe: On<br />

LorsquelafonctJonSelect. le haut-parleur est r6glee<br />

Haut-parleur TV,<br />

" Haut-parieur TV: On, Haut-p. exteme: On<br />

Si vous ne recevezaucun signalsonore, lesoil sera coupe<br />

dans les deux haut-parleurs.<br />

R_initialisation du son (OK/Annuler)<br />

Retablittousles reglagesde I'imageaux reglagespreddinis par<br />

defauten usine.<br />

Reglagede I'horloge<br />

(_ MENUrlTI -_ Configuration -> Heure -> ENTERE_<br />

Heure<br />

[] Horloge: Le reglagede I'horlogeestnecessairepour pouvoir<br />

utiliserlesdiverses fonctionsde minuteriedu televiseur.<br />

(_ L'heures'affichechaquelois que vous appuyezsur le<br />

bouton _NFO.<br />

Si vous debranchezle cordon d'alimentation,vous<br />

devez regler I'horlogede nouveau.<br />

Mode horloge (Auto / Manuel)<br />

- Auto : Permetde reglerrheureautomatiquementen utilisant<br />

I'heuredu signald'une cha;nenumerique.<br />

L'antennedolt 6tre brancheepour que le reglage<br />

automatiquede I'hodoges'effectue.<br />

- Manuel : ReglezI'heuremanueilement.<br />

0 Frangais<br />

Enfonction de lastation emettdce et du signal,il est<br />

possibleque la fonctJonde reglageautomatiquede<br />

I'heurene fonctionnepas correctement. Dansun tel<br />

cas, reglez rhorloge manuellement.<br />

Fuseauhot. : Ohoislssezvotre fuseauhoralre.<br />

Cette fonction n'est accessible que Iorsquela fonction<br />

Mode horloge est regleea Auto,<br />

H. d'ete (Daylight Saving Time) (Off/On) : Permetd'actlver<br />

et de desactiverlafonction de I'heureavancee.<br />

Cette fonction n'est accessible que Iorsquela fonction<br />

Mode horloge est regleea Auto,<br />

Utilisation de la fonction de veille<br />

(_ MENUrm _ Configuration _ Heure _ Mise en veiile<br />

EHTERIZ_<br />

Mise en veille _: @teintautomatiquementle<br />

tel6viseurapres ledelai choisi.(30, 60, 90, I20, I50 et I80<br />

minutes).<br />

Pourdesactiver lafonction Mise en veille, selectionnez<br />

Off.<br />

Reglagede la raiseen marche et de I'arr_t de<br />

la minuterie<br />

(_ MENurm _ Configuration _ Heure _ Minuterie 1<br />

ENTERI_<br />

Vous pouvezreglerletel6viseurde manierequ'il s'allume<br />

automatiquementa une heurepreddinie.<br />

[] Minuterie 1 / Minuterie 2 / Minuterie 3: Troisreglagesde<br />

minuterie(raiseen marchdarr6t) peuvent6tre effectues.Tout<br />

d'abord, vous devezreglerrhorloge.


Marche / Arr6t : ReglezI'heure,les minuteset activer/<br />

desactiver.(Pour activerle minuteuravec lereglagechoisi,<br />

regleza Activer,)<br />

Volume : Selectionnerle niveausonoredesir&<br />

Contenu : Selectionnelecontenu IV ou USBa life Iorsque<br />

le televiseurse met en marcheautomatiquement.(L'option<br />

USBn'est disponibleque si un dispositifUSBest brancheau<br />

tel6viseur.)<br />

REMARQUE<br />

* Sile dispositif USBne contient aucun fichier musical<br />

ou que ledossier contenant lefichier musical n'est<br />

pas s61ectionne,la fonction Timer (Veilleou Reveil)ne<br />

fonctionnerapas correctement.<br />

* IIest impossiblede creer un diaporama s'il n'y a<br />

qu'un seul fichier photo dans ledispositif USB.<br />

* Sile nora du dossierest trop long, il ne peut 6tre<br />

selectionne.<br />

* Ohaquedispositif USButilise recoit son propre<br />

dossier.Lorsquevous utilisezplus d'un dispositif<br />

USBd'un m6me type,assurez-vousque chaque<br />

dossierassigne a chaque dispositifUSB recoit un<br />

nom different.<br />

R@eter : SelectionnezUne fois, Quotid., Lun~Ven,<br />

Lun~Sam, Sam~Dim ou Manuel selonvos besoins.<br />

Selectionnezla fonction Manuel afinde choisir lejour auquel<br />

vous voulezactiver laminuterie.<br />

Lesymbole _/indique lejour selectionne.<br />

Arr6tautomatique (disponibleseulementIorsqueleteleviseur<br />

est mis sous tension par lafonction de minute@):Le<br />

televiseurse met automatiquement hors tensionapres trois<br />

heuressi aucune commande ne lul est envoyee.<br />

V-Chip<br />

Exclusionautomatique de programmes<br />

MENUITN -_ Configuration -_ ENTERE_<br />

La fen_trede saisiedu code NIPs'affiche,entrezvotre NIPde<br />

quatre chiffres.<br />

La fonctionV-Chipbloque automatiquementla diffusiond'emissions<br />

pouvant ne pasconvenirauxenfants. L'utilisateurdoit entrerun<br />

numerod'identificationpersonnel(NIP)avantde pouvoirconfigurer<br />

ou modifierles restrictionsrelativesa la fonctionV-Chip.<br />

REMARQUE<br />

* La fonction V-Chip n'est pasdisponible en mode HDMI,<br />

Composante ou PC.<br />

* Le code NIP par ddaut d'un nouveautel6viseurest ,,<br />

0-0-0-0 ,,.<br />

* Perm. tout : Deverrouilletoutes les classificationsdu<br />

tel6viseur.<br />

* Bloq. tout : Verroullletoutes les classificationsdu<br />

tel6viseur.<br />

[] Blocage V-Chip (Off / On): Vous pouvezbloquerdes<br />

emissionsselon un systemede classification.<br />

[] Cont. paten. TV:Vous pouvezbloquerdesemissionsselon<br />

leur classification.Cette fonctionvous permetde contrOlerles<br />

emissionsque vos enfants regardent.<br />

- IV-Y: Jeunesenfants/ TV-Y7: Enfantsde plus de 7<br />

ans/ IV-G: Tout public/ TV-PG: Surveillanceparentale<br />

recommandee/ TV-14: Telespectateursde plus de 14 ans/<br />

TV-MA:Adultes<br />

- Tout: Blocagede toutes lesclassifications./ FV: Fantastique<br />

et Violence/ V:Violence/ S: Scenesde sexe/ L: Langage<br />

adulte/ D: Dialoguesa caracteresexuel<br />

La fonction V-Chip permet de bloquer<br />

automatiquementcertalnes classificationsavec un<br />

contenu de nature delicate. Par exemple,si vous<br />

bloquez lacategorie TV-Y,la categorieTV-Y7 sera<br />

automatiquementbloquee. De lam_me fa_on,sl<br />

vous bloquezla categorie TV-G, toutes les categories<br />

dansle groupe des jeunesadultes serontalors<br />

bloquees(TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 et TV-MA). Les<br />

sous-categories(D,L, S, V) fonctionnentde la m6me<br />

fa_on. Donc,si vous bloquezla sous-categorieL de<br />

la categorieTV-PG, les sous-categories L de TV-14<br />

et de TV-MA sont bloqueesautomatiquement.<br />

[] Classif. MPAA: Vous pouvezbloquerlesfilms en fonctlon<br />

de laclassificationMPAA.La Motion PictureAssociationof<br />

America(MPAA)a etabliun systemede classificationqui<br />

fournitaux parentsou adultesexercantune surveillancedes<br />

renseignementssur lesfilmsconvenantauxenfants.<br />

- G: Publicde tous&ges(aucunerestriction)./ PG:<br />

Surveillanceparentalerecommandee./ PG-13:Supervision<br />

des parentsfortementrecommandee./ R: Avec<br />

restriction.Lesenfants de moinsde 17 ans devraient_tre<br />

accompagnesd'un adulte. / N0-17: Non recommandepour<br />

les enfantsde moinsde 17ans. / X: Adultesseulement./<br />

NR: Nonclass&<br />

La fonction V-Chip permet de bloquer<br />

automatiquementtoute classificationavec un<br />

contenu de nature delicate. Par exemple,si la<br />

classificationPG-13est bloquee,les classifications<br />

R, N0-17 et X sont automatlquementbloquees.<br />

[] Anglais canadien: Vous pouvezbloquerdes emissionsselon<br />

leur classificationenanglaiscanadien.<br />

- C: Emissionsdestineesauxenfantsde moinsde 8 ans.<br />

/ 08+: Emissionsconvenantgeneralementauxenfants<br />

de 8 anset plus,sans surveillance./ G: Emissionsgrand<br />

publicconvenanta tousles audltoires./ PG: Surveillance<br />

parentale./ 14+: Emissionsdont lateneur peut ne pas<br />

convenir,en tout ou en pattie,aux enfantsde moinsde 14<br />

ans./ 18+: Emissionspour adultes.<br />

La fonction V-Chip permet de bloquer<br />

automatiquementtoute classificationavec un<br />

contenu de nature delicate. Par exemple,si la<br />

classificationG est bloquee, les classificationsPG,<br />

14+ et 18+ sont automatlquementbloquees.<br />

Francais 21


Fonctionsde base<br />

[] Frangaiscanadien: Vous pouvezbloquerdesemissionsselon<br />

bur classificationen fra%aiscanadbn.<br />

- G: General/8 ans+: Emissionsconvenantg@erabment<br />

auxenfantsde 8 ans et pBs, sans sur_/eillance. / 13 ans+:<br />

Emissionspouvant ne pasconvenirauxenfantsde moins<br />

de I3 ans,/ 16 ans+: Emissionspouvant ne pasconvenir<br />

auxenfantsde moinsde 16 ans,/ 18 ans+: Emissionspour<br />

adultes.<br />

La fonction V-Chip permet de bloquer<br />

automatiquementtoute classificationavec un<br />

contenu de naturedelicate, Par exempb, si vous<br />

bloquezla categorb 8 arts+, bs categorbs<br />

13 ans+, 16 ans+ et 18 ans+ seront<br />

automatiquementbloquees,<br />

[] Categ. americaine telechargeable: IIest possibled'utiliser<br />

de Hnformationsur b contrObparentaltout en regardantdes<br />

canauxnumeriques,<br />

REMARQUE<br />

* SiI1nformationn'estpas tel6charg6ea partir de la<br />

stationde radiodiffusion,b menu<br />

Categ. americaine telechargeable est d6sacSve.<br />

* L_informationrelativeau contrOb parentalest<br />

automatiquementt61echarg6ependant b<br />

vbionnement de canauxnumeriques.Cela peut<br />

prendre quelquessecondes.<br />

* Le menu Categ. americaine telechargeable peut<br />

6tre utilbe apres b t61echargementde I'information<br />

pardrde lastation de t61ediffusion.Cependant,selon<br />

la stationemettrbe, la foncSonpourrait ne pas 6tre<br />

accessible.<br />

* Les niveauxde contrOb parentaldifferent selon<br />

la stationde radiodiffusion,Le nora de menupar<br />

ddaut et bs modi%ations de Categ. americaine<br />

telechargeable varbnt selon bs informations<br />

tel6charg6es.<br />

* M6mesi vous regbz I'affbhage a I'ecrandans<br />

une autre langue, b menu Categ. americaine<br />

telechargeable s'affiche en anglab seubment,<br />

* Le dassement permet de bloquerautomatiquement<br />

certainesdassifbations avec un contenu de nature<br />

delbate.<br />

* Lescategorbs (par exempb: Humor Level,,etc)et bs<br />

niveauxde classification(parexempb: DH, MH, H,<br />

etc) peuventdifferer selon lastation de tel6diffusion.<br />

[] Changer NiP: L'ecranChangerNIPs'affbhe, Choisissezun<br />

code NiPa quatrechiffreset sabissez-b. Lorsquevous avez<br />

entre b code NIP a quatre chiffres,I'ecranConfirmer NiP<br />

apparaL Sabissezde nouveaubs quatrechiffres.Quand<br />

I'ecran de confirmationdispara;t,leNIP est m6morbe.<br />

2 Fran_ais<br />

Visionnement d'un canal & acces restreint<br />

Si un canala acces restreintest syntonise,la fonctionV-Chiple<br />

bloque, L'ecrandevbnt vide et b messagesuivants'affbhe:<br />

Ce canal est bloqueen modeV-Chip,Veuilbz entrerun NIPpour<br />

debloquer.<br />

Sivous avezoublie votre NIP,appuyezsur bs touches de<br />

la tel6commandedans I'ordresuivantpour retablirb code<br />

0-0-0-0, POWER(arr6t)_ MUTE _ 8 _ 2 _ 4 _ POWER<br />

(robe en march@<br />

Autres fonctions<br />

(_ MENUITrl _ Configuration _ EI/TERE]}_<br />

Langue<br />

Reglagede la hngue de menu.<br />

1. Sebctionnez laI Langue puisappuyezsur la touche<br />

ENTERE]_,<br />

2. Choisissezlalanguevoulue puisappuyezsur la touche<br />

ENTERI_%_,<br />

Vous pouvezchoisir English, Espa_ol ou Frangais,<br />

Sous-titres<br />

(textea %cran)<br />

Sous-titres (Off/ On):Vous pouvezactiver<br />

ou desactiverla fonctiondes sous-titres,Si la<br />

fonctiondes sous-titresn'est pasdisponibb, il<br />

n'y a pasd'affichagea I'ecran,<br />

L'optionSous-titres nefonctionne pas<br />

dans bs modes Composante, HDMI ou<br />

PC.<br />

Mode ss-titres codes: Vous pouvezsebctionnerb modede<br />

sous-titragesouhaite.<br />

L'optionde sous-titragedisponibled@end de I'emission<br />

diffusee,<br />

Par defaut / OO1~004 / Textel ~Texte4:(canauxanalogiques<br />

seubment) La fonctionde sous-titrageanalogiquefonctionne<br />

en modecanauxanalogiquesou Iorsqu'unsignalest fourni<br />

au tel6viseura partir d'un appareilexterne,(Selonb signal<br />

emetteur,b sous-titrageanalogiquepeut peut-_trefonctionner<br />

sur bs canauxnumeriques.)<br />

Par defaut / Service1 ~ Service6 / OO1 ~ 004 /<br />

Textel ~ Texte4:(canauxnumeriquesseubment) Lafonction<br />

des sous-titresnumeriquesfonctionneseubment sur bs<br />

canauxnumeriques.<br />

Les parametresService1 ~ 6 en mode Sous-titres<br />

numeriques ne sont pastoujours disponibbs, selon b<br />

systeme de diffusion uti%e,


[] Options desous-titrage numerique: (canaux numeriques<br />

seulement)<br />

faille: Losoptions sont :Par defaut, Petit, Standard etGrand.<br />

Lavaleur parddaut estStandard.<br />

Styledespolices: Losoptions sont :Par ddaut etStyles de0<br />

7.Lavaleur parddaut estStyleO.<br />

Couleur avant-plan: Lesoptions sont :Parddaut, Blanc,<br />

Noir, Rouge, Vert, Bleu, Jaune, Magenta etOyan. Vous pouvez<br />

modifier lacouleur descaracteres. Lacouleur parddaut est<br />

Blanc.<br />

Couleur arriere-pian: Losoptions sont :Pardefaut, Blanc,<br />

Noir, Rouge, Vert, Bleu, Jaune, Magenta etOyan. Vous pouvez<br />

modifier lacouleur deI'arrBre-plan desous-titres. Lavaleur<br />

parddaut estNoir.<br />

Opacite avant-plan: Permet deselectionner I'opacite du<br />

texte. Losoptions sont :Par defaut, Transparent, Translucide,<br />

Opaque etClignotement.<br />

Opacite arriere-plan: Ajuste I'opacite d'arrBre-plan dusoustitrage.<br />

Losoptions sont :Par ddaut, Transparent, Translucide,<br />

Opaque etClignotement.<br />

Retour pardefaut: Cette option retablit losparametres par<br />

defaut desfonctions suivantes Taille, Style despolices, Couleur<br />

avant-plan, Couleur arrBre-plan, Opacite avant-plan etOpacite<br />

arrBre-plan.<br />

REMARQUE<br />

"LesOptions desous-titrage numerique sont<br />

accessibles uniquement Iorsque losoptions<br />

Pardefaut etService1 ~Service6 peuvent _tre<br />

selectionnees enMode ss-titres codes.<br />

, Eoption desous-titrage disponible d@end de<br />

I'emission diffusee.<br />

* Eexpression Pardefaut signifie revenir auxchoix de<br />

sous-titrage initiaux determines par lediffuseur.<br />

* Eavant-plan etI'arrBre planepeuvent pas6tre<br />

configures delam_me couleur.<br />

* Vous nepouvez pasddinir Opacite avant-plan et<br />

Opacite arriere-plan aTransparent.<br />

Mode Jeu (Off !On): ..............................................................<br />

En selectionnantle mode Jeu,Iorsquevous branchezune console<br />

de jeu comme PlayStationMCou XboxMC,vous pouvezvivreune<br />

experiencede jeu plus realiste.<br />

REMARQUE<br />

* Precautionsa prendre et limites du mode Jeu.<br />

- Pour debrancherlaconsole de jeuet brancherun autre<br />

apparel]exteme, desactivez]eMode Jeu a Off dans]e<br />

menude configuration.<br />

- Sile menudu teBviseurest afficheen Mode Jeu, ]'ecran<br />

vibreBgerement.<br />

Mode Jeu n'est pasdisponibie si la source d'entree est<br />

r6gleesur TV ou PC.<br />

* Apres avoirbranche laconsole de jeu, reglezI'option Mode<br />

Jeu a On. Maiheureusement,vous pourrieznoter une<br />

alterationde I'image.<br />

* Sile Mode Jeu est regB sur On:<br />

- Le modeimage est regB sur Standard et le mode Son<br />

est regB sur Cinema.<br />

- L'option I_galiseurn'est pas disponible.<br />

M61odie (Off / Basse / Moyen / Haute)<br />

Permetall teBviseurde fairejouerune melodieIorsquevous<br />

I'aliumezet I'eteignez.<br />

REMARQUE<br />

* La melodie nejoue pas.<br />

- Lorsquele teBviseurn'emet aucun son parceque I'on a<br />

appuye sur latouche MUTE.<br />

- Lorsquele teBviseurn'emet aucun son parceque le<br />

volumea et6 reduitau minimuma I'aidede ]atouche<br />

VOL -.<br />

- Lorsquela fonctionMise en veille met leteBviseurhors<br />

tension.<br />

Solutions _conomiques<br />

MENUITrl _ Configuration _ ENTERI_<br />

Vous pouvezutiliserlafonction Eco pour augmenterleseconomies<br />

d'energie.<br />

Econ. E_nergie(Off / Basse / Moyen / Haute /<br />

Auto) ........................................................................................<br />

Cette option permet de reglerla luminositede I'ecranafinde reduire<br />

la consommationd'energie. Lorsqu'onregardela teBvisionlesol il<br />

faut reglerI'option du mode #con. #nergie a Haute pour reduirela<br />

fatigueoculaireet laconsommationd'@qergie.<br />

Fran%is 23


Fonctionsde base<br />

MENUITrl _ Assistance -_ ENTERE_<br />

Autodiagnostic<br />

Eautodiagnosticpeut prendre quelquessecondes; cela fait<br />

pattie du fonctionnementnormal du televiseur,<br />

[] Essai d'image: Utilisezcette fonctionpour verifierles<br />

problemesd'image.<br />

Oui : Sile parcoursne s'affichepasou s'il y a du bruit dansla<br />

mire,sebctionnezOui. IIest possiblequevotre tel6viseursoit<br />

defectueux,Oommuniquezavec lecentred'appel de Samsung<br />

pour obtenir de I'assistance(I -800-SAMSUNG),<br />

Non : Sila mires'affichecorrectement,sebctionnezNon. II est<br />

possiblequ'un appareilextemesoit defectueux,Veuilbz verifier<br />

bs connexions.Si le problemepersiste,consultezle guide<br />

d'utilisationde I'appareilexteme.<br />

[] Essai de son : Utilisela melodieint6greepour verifierbs<br />

problemesde son,<br />

Si les haut-parburs du televiseurn'emettentaucun son,<br />

assurez-vousque le mode Select. le haut-parleur est<br />

regle a Haut-parleur TV dans le menuSon.<br />

Vous entendrezlamelodie durant I'essaim6mesi le<br />

Select. le haut-parleur est r6gle a Naut-p. externe ou<br />

si vous avezcoupe leson avec la touche MUTE,<br />

Oui : Si,au cours de I'essaide son,un seulhaut-parbur<br />

emet du son ou si lesdeux haut-parburs n'emettentaucun<br />

son, sebctionnezOui. IIest possibleque votret61eviseursoit<br />

defectueux,Oommuniquezavec lecentred'appel de Samsung<br />

pour obtenir de I'assistance(I -800-SAMSUNG),<br />

Non : Sibs haut-parleursemettentun son normal,<br />

selectionnezNon. IIest possiblequ'un appareilexteme soit<br />

defectueux,Veuilbzverifier bs connexions,Si le probleme<br />

persiste,consultezleguide d'utilisationde I'appareilexteme.<br />

[] Puissance du signal : (canauxnumeriquesseubment) Les<br />

canaux HD ont une receptionparfaiteou ne sont pascaptes<br />

du tout, D@lacezI'antennede manierea augmenterla<br />

puissancedu signal.<br />

4 Fran_ais<br />

Mise & niveau du Iogiciel<br />

Ulterieurement,Samsungmettra a dispositiondes raisesa niveau<br />

du micrologicielpour let61eviseur.VisitezSamsung.comou<br />

communiquezavec le centred'appel Samsungen composant<br />

1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)pour obtenirde I'informationsur le<br />

tel6chargementdes raisesa niveauet sur I'utilisationd'une cle USB,<br />

Les raisesa joursont accessibbs en brancllant unecle USB dans<br />

le port USB,<br />

Au moment de laraisea niveaudu micrologiciel,les reglages<br />

video et audio que vous avez effectuesseront remplacespar<br />

les reglagespar ddaut (ddinis ell usine).<br />

Nous vous recommandonsde prendre en notevos reglages<br />

afin de pouvoir bs retablirfacibment apres la raisea niveau.<br />

Guide de connexion HD<br />

Reportez-vousa cette rubriqueIorsquevous branchezdes appareils<br />

extemesau televiseur,<br />

Contact Samsung ..................................................................<br />

Consultezcette rubriqueIorsquevotretel6viseurne fonctionnepas<br />

cerrectementou Iorsquevous souhaitezmettre a niveaule Iogiciel,<br />

Vousy trouverezde I'informationsur nos centresd'appel et sur la<br />

fagonde tel6chargerdes produitset Iogiciels,


Fonctionsavancees<br />

I<br />

1.<br />

2.<br />

3,<br />

musicauxou des filmsenregistressur un dispositifUSB<br />

memoirede grandecapacite (MSC).<br />

Visualisezdes photographieset Iisezdes fichiers<br />

_} MENUrlTI _ Application _ Media Play (USB)<br />

ENTERE_<br />

Branchementd'un dispositif USB<br />

Mettez le t61eviseuren marche.<br />

Branchezun dispositifUSBcontenantdes photos, de la musiqueou des fichiersvideo<br />

dans lapriseUSB, situeesur le cOtedu televiseur.<br />

Une fen6trecontextuelles'afficheIorsquevous branchezun dispositifUSBau t61eviseur.<br />

SelectionnezI'option Media Play.<br />

Lemenu Media Play<br />

Lecture d'une photo (ou d'un Diaporama)<br />

1. Appuyezsur latouche MENU.Appuyezsur latouche A ou _' pour<br />

selectionnerApplication, pub sur ENTERI_.<br />

2. Appuyezsur latouche A ou T pour sebctionner Media Play (USB), pub sur<br />

ENTERI_.<br />

3. Appuyezsur latouche A ou T pour selectionnerledispositifde memoire<br />

USBcorrespondant,pub appuyezsur latouche ENTERI_.<br />

Branchezun dispositifUSB contenant desflchiers JPEGet/ou MP3<br />

dans la priseMedia Playsituee sur lecOtedu televiseur.<br />

Certains dispositifs peuvent ne pas 6tre pris en charge en raison d'un<br />

problemede compatibilite.<br />

4. Appuyezsur latouche ,q ou _ pour passera une leone (Photo, Music,<br />

Setup), Appuyezsur ENTERI_.<br />

IIest possible que cela ne fonctionnepas correctement avec desfichiers multimediasnon autodses.<br />

A savoir avant d'utiliserMedia Play (USB)<br />

Panneau arrieredu tel6viseur<br />

Cle USB<br />

" Vous nedevez utiliserque des caracteresalphanumeriquespour nommer lesdossiers ou fichiers(photo, musique).<br />

, Le systeme de fichiersne prenden chargeque leformat FAT16/32(le systemede flchiersNTFSn'est pas prisen charge).Certain<br />

types d'appareilaudio ou d'appareilphoto numerique USB ne sont pascompatibles avecce tel6viseur.<br />

" La fonction Media Play(USB)ne prend en charge que les dispositifs USBa memoirede grande capacite (MSO).Le dispositif MSO<br />

(,,Mass StorageClass ,,)est un dispositifde memoirede grande capacite en bloc seulement.Parmiles exemples de MSC, on<br />

trouveles disques Thumb et les lecteurs de cartes Flash(USBet HUB ne sont pas pris en charge).<br />

" Avantde brancher ledispositif au t61eviseur,veillera effectuer unecopie de sauvegardedes flchiersafind'evitertoute perte ou<br />

dommage. SAMSUNGnesaurait 6tre tenueresponsabledes dommagesaux fichiersou de perte de donnees.<br />

" Veuillezvous brancherdirectement au port USB de votre t61eviseur. II peut y avoirun problemede compatibilite USBsi vous utilisez<br />

un branchement par cable distinct.<br />

Francais 25


Fonctionsavancees<br />

Photo<br />

* Seulsdes formatsde fichier MP3et JPEGsont prisen charge,<br />

* Le format MP3 Media Play(USB)ne prend en chargeque les fichiersmusicauxavec une frequenced'@chantillonnage@lev@e (32<br />

kHz, 44,I kHz, ou 48 kHz).<br />

* Nousvous recommandonsleformat JPEGs@quentiel.<br />

* Ne d@branchezpasle dispositif USBpendant sonchargement,<br />

* Le MTP (protocolede transfert de m@dia)n'est pas pris en charge,<br />

* Le temps de lecture d'un fichier rap3 peut s'afficher sous la forme "00:00:00" si I'informationrelativeau temps de lecture n'est pas<br />

d@tect@eau d@butdu fichier.<br />

* Plusla r@solutionde I'imageest @lev@e, plus elle prend du temps a s'afflcher a I'@cran.<br />

* La listede fichiersmusicauxou de photos contbnt jusqu'a 300 dossiers ou fichiers.<br />

* Le chargement peut prendre quelque secondes, selon la tailledu fichier.<br />

* Lesfichbrs MP3prot@g@spar DRM, t@l@charg@s de sites payants,ne peuvent 6tre lus.<br />

* La gestion des droits num@riques(DRM)est unetechnologie qui soutbnt lacr@ation,la distribution et lagestion du contenu de<br />

facon int@gr@eet globale,notamment par la protectiondes droits et int@rTtsdes foumisseursde contenu, la pr@ventionde la copb<br />

ill@galedu contenu, ainsique la gestionde lafacturation et des r@glements,<br />

* Le mode d'@conomied'@nergiede certains disques durs externespeut @treactiv@automatiquement Iorsqu'ilssont branch@sau<br />

t@l@viseur.<br />

* Siun cable de rallonge USBest utilis@,I'appareilUSB pourrait ne pas6tre reconnuou les fichierssur I'appareilpourraientne pas<br />

6tre lus.<br />

* Sile dispositif USBbranch@au t@l@viseur n'est pasreconnu, laliste desfichiers dansle dispositifest corrompue ou qu'un fichbr<br />

dans laliste n'est pas lu,branch@ledispositif USBa un ordinateur,formatezdeet v@rifiezla connexion.<br />

* Siun fichiersupprim@sur I'ordinateurest toujours pr@sentIorsquevous ex@cutezla fonction Media Play,supprimezlefichier de<br />

fagonpermanentesur I'ordinateura I'aidede I'option "Vider lacorbeille".<br />

Lecture d'une photo (ou d'un Diaporama)<br />

1. Appuyezsur latouche INFO pour afficherI'optionAfficher, Dem. DJaporama,<br />

Supprimer, Supprimer tout, Deselect. Tout.<br />

2. Appuyezsur latouche A ou T pour s@lectionnerDem. Diaporama, puis sur<br />

ENTERE_.<br />

Pendantle diaporama, les fichierss'affichentdarts I'ordre,a partir du<br />

fichier affich@.<br />

IIest possible de life des fichiers MP3automatiquement pendantun<br />

diaporama si lafonction Musique de fond par ddaut est r@gl@e a On,<br />

Pouractiver cettefonction, les fichiers MP3et les autresfichiers photo<br />

doivent se trouverdarts le re@medossier du dispositifa re@moireUSB,<br />

Appuyezsur la touche tfqFOpendantle diaporama pour r@glerles options suivantesVitesse du diap., Musique de fond, Selection<br />

musique de fond, Liste Appuyezsur latouche A ou T pour s@lectionnerd'options, pub sur EI/TERI_.<br />

- Apr@savoirr@gl@l'option, appuyezsurlatoucheEI/TERE__ poureffectuerla modification.<br />

Appuyezsur la touche H/FO pendantle diaporama pour r@glerles options suivantes:Dem. Diaporama, Zoom, Rotation, Liste.<br />

Appuyezsur la touche A ou _' pour s@lectionnerd'options, puis sur ENTERIng.<br />

- Apr@savoir r@gl@I'option,appuyezsur latouche ENTERI_ pour effectuerlamodification.<br />

6 Fran_ais


Musique<br />

Utilisation de la liste MP3<br />

IcOnede dossier<br />

IcOneListe de fichiersmusicaux<br />

Passera I'icOnede dossierde retape pr6cedente<br />

Appuyezsur la touche _ (REW)ou _ (FF)pour changer de page.<br />

Lefichier selectionneest affiche en t6te de listeavec sa duree de lecture,<br />

1. Pourchoisirtousles fichiersou un fichier,appuyezsur la touche [NFO pour<br />

afficherles menus Musique.<br />

Appuyezsur latouche ENTERIZ_ pour selectionnerLecture (or Life le<br />

fichier selectionne), Musique Mode de repetition, Supprimer (orEffacer<br />

fichier sel.), Supprimer tout or Deselect. tout<br />

2. Appuyezsur latouche A ou T, pour passer a une ic6ne, puisappuyersur la<br />

touche ENTER[_.<br />

Appuyezsur latouche ENTERI_ sur une ic6nede note de musiquepour life<br />

immediatement]e fichierde musique,<br />

Sivous appuyezsur la touche ENTERIZ_ pendantqu'un dossierest en<br />

surbrillance,les fichiersmusicauxqu'il contients'affichent,<br />

[] Lecture: Se]ectionnerpour ]iredes fichiersMP3,<br />

Ce menuaffiche uniquementles fichierspouwus d'une extension MP3. Lesfichierscomportant d'autres extensionsne sont pas<br />

affiches, m6mes'ils sont memoris6ssur le m6medispositif USB.<br />

Pourregler levolume de la musique,appuyezsur la touche - VOI_÷ de lat61ecommande.Pour couper le son,appuyezsur la<br />

touche _ MUTE de latelecommande.<br />

[] Musique Mode de repetition (On/ Off): Selectionnerpour rep6terlalecture desfichiersMP3dans ledossiercourant,<br />

Lecture musicale<br />

• N'affiche que les fichiersdont rextensionest MP3. Lesfichierscomportant d'autres extensionsne sont pasaffiches,m@mes'ils sont<br />

memoris6ssur le m6medispositifUSB.<br />

• Si levolumesembleetrange pendantlalecture de fichiersMP3, reglezles options #galiseur et SRSTruSurround HD dans lemenu<br />

Son. (UnfichierMP3 surmodulepeut 6trea roriginedes problemessonores)<br />

• IcOned'informationde lafonction Musique<br />

_ Reprise de la musique est reg]e a On,<br />

Reprise de la musique est reglea Off,<br />

[La toucle F_q Lecture/ _iq (Pause)de lateJ6commandeest enfonceependantlalecturede la musique.<br />

Lorsquevous appuyezsur latouche _q (Arr6t)de la telecommande,la musiques'arr@te,<br />

Francais 27


Fonctionsavancees<br />

Configuration ...............................................................................................................................................................<br />

Utilisation du menu Configuration<br />

[] Vitesse du diaporama: Selectionnezcette option pour commander lavitesse<br />

du diaporama.VouspouvezselectionnerRapide, Normal ou Lent.<br />

[] Musique de fond: Selectionnerpour determinersi un flchbr MP3 seral<br />

lu pendantun diaporama. IIest possiblede selectionnerMusiqueOn ou<br />

MusiqueOff.<br />

[] Selection musique de fond: Pendant levisionnementd'un diaporama,<br />

utilisezI'optionSelection musique de fond pour selectionnerun fichbr<br />

musicakSelectionnerun fichbr MP3comme musiquede fond.<br />

[] Reprise de la musique: Selectionnerpour determinersi vous voulezque la<br />

lecture de la musiquesoit r@et6e apresque tousles fichbrs MP3dans le<br />

dossbr courantont et6 entendus,<br />

[] I_crande veille: Choisircetteoption pour fixerle temps d'attente avant ledemarragede I'ecrande veille.L'ecrande veilleappara_trasi<br />

vous n'appuyezsur aucunetouche apres4 heures,8 heures ou 10 heures.<br />

[] Supp. s@urit& IIest possiblede retirerledispositifdu t61eviseurde facon sore.<br />

Lecture des fichier musicaux / photos selectionnes<br />

® Appuyezsur latouche jaune,<br />

• R@eterretape pr6cedentepour selectionnerlesfichbrs musicauxou photos souhaites,<br />

Lesfichierss61ectionne sent marquesdu symbole _z.Appuyez sur la touche jaune pour annulet la selection,<br />

• Appuyer sur latouche FCq(Lecture)/ ENTERI_ pour life les fichbrs ou photos selectionnes,<br />

8 Fran_ais


Autreinformation<br />

Fixation du support d'obturation<br />

Fixezlesupport d'obturation Iorsde I'installationdu tel6viseursur un mur, ,, oo_oo_ooo<br />

Installation de I'ensemble de fixation murale<br />

L'ensemblede fixationmurale(vendusepar6ment)permetde fixerletel6viseurau mur. Pourobtenirdes instructionsdetailleessur I'installation<br />

du supportmural,reportez-vousaux instructionsfoumiesavec I'ensemble,DemandezI'aided'un technicienpour I'installer.Samsung<br />

Electronicsn'est pas responsabledes dommagescausesa I'appareilni desblessuressi vous tentez d'installerlesupportvous-m6me,<br />

Specifications de I'ensemble d'installation murale (VESA)<br />

Latrousse d'lnstallatlon muralen'est paslncluse. Elleest vendue separ6ment.<br />

Installezvotresupport muralsur un tour massifperpendiculaireau plancher.Pour le fixersur d'autres types de materiaux,veuillez<br />

communiqueravec votredetaillant.Sivous I'installezau plafondou sur un tour incline,il risque de tomber et de causerdes blessures,<br />

REMARQUE<br />

" Lesdimensionsstandard pour lesensembles de fixation muralefigurentdans letableau ci-dessous.<br />

" Un manuel d'lnstallationd6tailleeet toutes les pieces necessairesa I'assemblagesent comprisesa I'achatde I'ensemble<br />

d'installationmurale,<br />

" N'utilisezpas de vis non conformes aux specificationsde vis standard VESA,<br />

" N'utilisezpas de vis plus Iongues que les dimensionsstandardou non conformes auxspecifications VESAde vis standard. Desvis<br />

trop Ionguespourraient endommagerI'interieurdu televiseur,<br />

" Ence qui a trait auxsupports muraux nonconformes aux specifications de vis de lanorme VESA,la Iongueurdesvis peut differer<br />

selon les specificationsdu support mural.<br />

" Ne serrezpas trop les vis, cela pourrait endommagerle produit ou provoquersa chute et causer des blessures, Samsungdecline<br />

toute responsabilitedans lecas o@de tels accidentsse produlsent,<br />

" Samsungne saurait 6tre tenu responsabledes dommagesau produit ou des blessuresoccasionnes par I'utilisationd'un support<br />

muralnon conforme auxspecifications VESAou non recommande,ou si le consommateurne suit pas les instructionsd'installation<br />

du produit,<br />

" Ne pas installer letel6viseura un angle d'inclinaison de plus de I5 degres.<br />

" IIfaut deuxpersonnes pour fixer let61eviseursur un tour,<br />

Francais 29


Autreinformation<br />

Ty<br />

Tel6viseurACL<br />

I9-22<br />

23-29 200 X 100<br />

75 X 75<br />

100 X 100 M4<br />

30-40 200 X 200 M6<br />

46-55 400 X 400<br />

57-65 600 X 400<br />

70-80 800 X 400<br />

80- 1400X 800<br />

M8<br />

N'installezpas lesupport muralIorsquele televiseurest sous tension.II pourraitsurvenirdes bbssures corporelles<br />

causees par un choc electrique.<br />

Le verrou Kensingtonn'est pasfoumit par Samsung.IIsert a immobiliserun appareil<br />

utilisedans un endroltpublic.L'aspect et lamethodede verrouillagepeuventdiffererde<br />

I'lllustratlonen fonction du fabrlcant.Reportez-vousau manuelfouml avecle disposltif<br />

de verroulllageKensingtonpour de plus ampbs renseignementset I'utlliserde fagon<br />

appropriee.<br />

RecherchezI'lcOne,


Misengarde: Lefaitdetirer, depousser oudemonter sur letel6viseur peut enprovoquer lachute. Assurez-vous<br />

notamment quevosenfants nesesuspendent pasautel6viseur niled6sequilibrent, car ilpourrait basculer etcauser des<br />

blessures serieuses o undeces. Suivez toutes lesmesures desecurit6 indiquees dans labrochure devotre tel6viseur. Pour<br />

unestabilite etunesecurit6 accrues, vous pouvez acheter etinstaller undispositif anti-chute telquedecrit ci-dessous.<br />

Dispositif de retenue pour televiseur (vendus@arement)<br />

Les piecesci-dessoussont inclusesdans I'ensembledu dispositifde retenuepour tel6viseur.De plus,vous aurezbesoind'une visa bois,<br />

d'une vis et d'une chevilleMollyou d'un autretypede visconvenanta I'armoireou au tour auquelvous avezI'intentionde fixer lecordon du<br />

dispositifde retenue,NousrecommandonsI'utilisationd'une visa bois M4xL20,<br />

Installation du dispositif de retenue<br />

1. Retirezlavis fixee a I'arrierede votre televiseur,puis reliezle dispositifde retenueace derniera I'aidede lavis inclusedans I'ensemble<br />

du dispositifqui convienta votreappareil.<br />

2,<br />

3,<br />

Veilleza utiliseruniquementlavis foumie appropriee.Sivous utilisezunevis differente,vous risquezd'endommagervotretel@iseur.<br />

Vissezrefinementlavis que vous avezfournie(tailleM4xL20ou similaire)a I'armoireou au tour sur lequel let61eviseurdolt 6tre installe,<br />

Si vousvissez lavis dans un mul il est prderable qu'elle penetre dans un montant.Si cela est impossible, utilisezunecheville<br />

Molly pour ancrer la vis,<br />

Attachezle cordondu dispositifde retenuea lavisfixeeau mur ou a I'armoireafind'immobiliserletel@iseur.Voirles illustrationsci-dessous.<br />

Installezle tel6viseura proximitedu tour de manierequ'il nese renversepas.<br />

Lorsquevous attachez le cordon du dispositif au tour, fixez-lede manierequ'ilsoit paralleleau sol ou inclinevers lebas pour des<br />

raisonsde securit6.<br />

Wrifiez le cordon a I'occasion pour vous assurerqu'il est bienfixe.<br />

Avant de d@lacer let61eviseur,detachez d'abord lecordon,<br />

4. VerifiezI'etat des connexions Verifiezperiodiquementles points d'ancrage afinde detecter tout signe de fatigue ou de bris En cas<br />

de doute au sujet des points d'ancrage, communiquez avec un installateurprofessionnel,<br />

Pour acheter le dispositif de retenue pour televiseur, communiquez avec le centre de service a.la clientele SAMSUNG.<br />

- Aux Etats-Unis:1-800-SAMSUNG(1-800-726-7864)<br />

- Au Canada: 1-800-SAMSUNG(1-800-726-7864)<br />

Francais 31


Autreinformation<br />

Sile televiseur semble @rouver un probleme, essayez d'abord de le corfiger a I'aide de la presente liste des problemes et solutions possibles.<br />

Si aucun de ces conseils de d@annage ne fonctionne, consultez le site ,,,puis cliquez sur Assistance ou communiquez<br />

avec le service a la clientele de Samsung en composant le 1-800-SAMSUNG,<br />

................t .......................... ..................................................................................................................<br />

Imagern_diocre Procedezd'abo[dauEssaid[image pourc0nfirmerqueratio t61@Jseur affiche9arrecfement!iimaged'gssak(allez_<br />

MENU- Supp0rt technique _Autodiagn0stia : Essaid'image)(p.24)<br />

SiI'imaged'essais'affichecorrectement, le probl_med'imagepout8trecausepar lasourceou lesignal.<br />

L'imagedu tel6viseurn'estpasaussibellequ'en o Sivousavezuncabloselecteurouun @cepteursatelliteanalogique,procurez-vousunrecepteurnum@iqueHD.<br />

magasin. UtilisezdescablesHDMIou composantespourobtenirune imagedequaliteHD(highdefinition).<br />

o Abonnesau cableou ausatellite: Essayez]es sanaaxHDde I'attributiondessanaux.<br />

o Antenne:EssayezlescanaaxHDaprBsexecutionde laprogrammationautomatique.<br />

'_ DenombreuxcanaaxHDsontsoumisaune interpolationL_parfirdu contenuSD(StandardDefinition).<br />

o Reglezla resolutionde sortievideodu cabloselecteurou recepteursatellitea 1080iou 720p.<br />

L'imageest ddormee:erreurmacrobloc,petit o Lacompressiondu contenuvideopeutcauserunedeformationde I'image,surtoutIorsquelos mouvementsent<br />

bloc,points,effetd'essalier, rapides,commedartslosfilmsdesportet d'action.<br />

o Unsignalfaiblepe_ causerunedeformationde I'image.IInes'agitpas d'un problemedutel@iseur.<br />

• L'utilisation de tel@bones cellulairesa proximite de tel6viseurs analogiques ou num@iques (jusqu'a<br />

une distance de 1 m) pout causer des parasites a I'ecran.<br />

Lescouleurssontfausseesou absentes, o Sivousavezuneconnexionavecdescablescomposantes,assurez-vousque loscablessontbranchesaux<br />

prisescorrespondantes.Desconnexionsincorrectesou lachespeuventcauserdesproblemesdecouleurou une<br />

absenced'image.<br />

Couleursouluminositemediocres, o RA:jlezlosoptionsImagedansle menudu tel6viseur.(AllezL_mode Image/ Couleur / Luminosit_/ itettet_)<br />

(p. 16)<br />

. R_lez FoptionEcon._nergie dansle menuConfiguration(p. 16)<br />

Essayezdereinitialiser]'imagepourvoir]esreglagesd'imageparddaut. (AllezL_MENU- Image-<br />

R_initialisationde I'image)(p. 18)<br />

Lignepointill@surle bardde I'@ran. _ Silataillede I'imageest r_l@ aPlein_oran, passezLN6:9(p. 17).<br />

Modifiezla resolutiondu cablos61ecteur our@epteursatellite.<br />

L'imageest enheiret blanc, o Sivous utilisezuneentr@AV composite,branchezlecablevideo(_aune) a laprisevertede Fentr@composante<br />

1du tel@iseur.<br />

L'imagefigeou est ddorm@ durantlos _ Sile televiseurest brancheL_uncabloselecteur,essayezde reinitialisercedernier.(Rebranchezlecordon<br />

changementsdecanaaxou sonaffichageest d'alimentationc.a. et attendezle redemarragedu cablos61ecteur. Oelapout prendrejusqu'L_20 minutes.)<br />

retarde. _ R_lez la resolutionde sortiedu cabloselecteura 1080iou 720p.<br />

P[obl6mede son Procedezd'abordau Essaide son pour Confirmerquele Sendevotretel@iseurfonctionnecorrectement.<br />

(allez__ENU _Support technique - Autodiagnostic _Essaide son) (p,24)<br />

Sile sonest parfait,leprobl_mepout provenirde lasourceoudu signal.<br />

IIn'ya pasdeson ou]e sonest trapbasalors _ Verifiezlevolumede Fappareil (cabloselecteur, recepteursatellite,]ecteurDVD,lecteurBlu-ray,etc.)branchea<br />

que levolumeestregleau maximum, votreteleviseur.<br />

L'imageest bonne,maispasde son. _ Reglez]'optionS_lect. le haut-parleurL_I-laut-parleur"IV darts]e menuSon (p. 20).<br />

Sivous utilisezunappareilexterne,assurez-vousqueloscablesaudiosentconnectesaaxbonnesprisesd'entree<br />

audiodu tel@iseur.<br />

Sivous utilisezunappareilexterne,v@ifiezI'optionde sortieaudiode I'appareil(p. ex.,vousdevrezpeut-@e<br />

modifierI'optionaudiodevotrecabloselecteurL_HDMIsi uncableHDMIest brancheL_votretel@iseur.)<br />

Sivous utilisezuncableDVlL_HDMI,uncableaudiodistinctestnecessaire.<br />

Sivotretel@iseurest doted'uneprisepourcasqued'@oute,assurez-vousquerien n'yest branche.<br />

Reinitialisez ]'apparel]connecteenbran@antanouveausoncordond'alimentation.<br />

Loshaut-parleursemettentdesbruits o Wfifiez lebranchementdes cables.Assurez-vousqu'uncablevideon'estpasbrancheL_uneentreeaudio.<br />

inappropries. _ Sile tel@iseurest brancheL_uneantenneou uncabloselecteur, v@ifiezI'intensitedusignal.Unsignalfaiblepeut<br />

causerune distorsionsonore.<br />

2 Frangais<br />

ProcedezL_Essaide sontelqu'expliqueci-dessus.


Pasd'image<br />

Letel6viseurnes'allumepas. o Assurez-vousque lecordond'alimentationc.a.est bienbranche5`laprisede courantmuraleet autel@iseur.<br />

o Assurez-vousque la prisede courantmuraleest soustension.<br />

o Appwez surlatouche POWERdu tel@iseurpourvousassurerque latel@ommandefonctionnecorrectement.Si<br />

letel6viseurs'allume,reportez-vousL_la section,,Latelecommandenefonctionnepas,,ci-dessous.<br />

Letel6viseurs'eteintautomatiquement, o Assurez-vousque le reglageMiseen veille est5`Off dansle menuConfiguration (p.20).<br />

o SivotrePCest brancheautel6viseur,verifiezlesreglagesde raisesoustensionde cedernier.<br />

o Assurez-vousque lecordond'alimentationc.a.est bienbranche5`laprisede courantmuraleet autel@iseuc<br />

o Lorsquevousregardezlatel@ision5`partird'uneconnexionparcs`bleou antenne,letel6viseurs'eteint<br />

automatiquement apresde 105`15minutess'ilne regoitaucunsignal.<br />

IIn'ya pasd'image. '_ V@ifiezlesconnexions(debranchezpuisbranchez5.nouveautouslesos`blesdu tel@iseuret desappareilsextemes).<br />

'_ Reglezlasortievideodevotreappareilexteme(cb.bloselecteur, lecteurDVD,lecteurBlu-ray,etc.)afinqu'elle<br />

correspondeauxbranchements5`I'entreedu tel@iseur.Parexemple,siI'appareilextemeaunesortieHDMI,ilfautle<br />

brancherauneentreeHDMIde latel6.<br />

ConnexionRF(cable/antenne)<br />

'_ Assurez-vousquelesappareilsbranchessontsoustension.<br />

'_ Assurez-vousdechoisirlasourceappropri@duteleviseurenappuyantsurlatoucheSOURCEde latelecommande.<br />

'_ Reinitialisez I'@pareilconnecteenbranchanta nouveausoncordond'alimentation.<br />

Letel6viseurneregoitpastousles canaux, o Assurez-vousque lecs`blecoaxialestbienbranche.<br />

o EssayezI'optionProg.auto pourajouterlessanauxdisponibles5`lalistedessanaux.Allez5`MENU- Canal-<br />

Prog.auto,puisselectionnezAutoet assurez-vousqueletypede signalde cs`bleapproprieest choisidartsle<br />

menu.IIexistetroisoptions: (STD,EIROet IRC)(p. 14)<br />

,, Verifiezsil'antenneest bienpositionnee.<br />

Pasde sous-titresaux sanauxnum@iques, o Verifiezlemenude configurationdessous-titres.Essayezde modifierleMode ss-titres ood_sService1L_OO1<br />

(p.22).<br />

,, IIestpossibleque certainscanauxn'aientpas desous-titres.<br />

L'imageest ddormee:erreurmacrobloc,petit o Lacompressiondu contenuvideopeutcauseruneddormationde I'image,surtoutIorsqueles mouvementsont<br />

bloc,points,effetd'escalier, rapides,commedartslesfilmsdesportet d'action.<br />

o Unsignalfaiblepeutcauseruneddormationde I'image.IInes'agitpas d'un problemedutel@iseur.<br />

Connexion au PC<br />

Lemessage,,Mode nondisponible,,s'affiche, o R6


Autreinformation<br />

Lemessage,,Mode nondisponible,,s'affiche. , Verifiezlaresolutionpriseenchargeparletel@iseuret reglezla resolutionde sortiede Fappareil externeen<br />

consequence.Consultezlesreglagesdesresolutionsa lapage12du presentguide.<br />

L'optionSous-titresdans lemenudu tel6viseur , IIest impossibledeselectionnerI'optionSous-titresdansle menudutel@iseursi cedernierest brancheau<br />

estgris@, moyendun cableHDMIou composantes(p.22).<br />

, L'optionSous-titresdoit 6treactiveesurI'appareilexterne(p. 22).<br />

Letel@iseurdegageuneodeurde plastique. , Cetteodeurest normaleet dispar_traavecletemps.<br />

L'optionPuissancesignaldu tel6viseur , Cetteoptionn'estoffertequ'aveclescanauxnum@iqueset uneantenne/ RP/ cb,blecoaxial)(p.24).<br />

n'estpasdisponibledansle menuEssai<br />

d'autodiagnostb.<br />

Letel@iseurest inclinedun c6te. o Retirezlepieddutel@iseuret assemblez-lede nouveau.<br />

Lemenudescanauxest grise(nondisponible). , LemenuChaine n'estdisponibleque Iorsquelasourcedu tel@iseurestselectionn6e.<br />

Vosreglagessontperdusapres30 minutesou , Siletel6viseurest regleaumode D_mornagasin,ilreinitialiseles rcglagesdu sonet de I'imagetoutesles30<br />

chaquelois que letel6viseuresteteint, minutes.Passezdu mode D_momagasinau modeUtil.a domicile dans laprocedurePr_t aI'emploi. Appuyez<br />

surlatoucheSOURCEpourselectionnerlemode"IVet allezL_MENU-_ Configuration-_ Pr6t a I'emploi_<br />

EN'TER_ (p.8).<br />

Perteintermittentedu sonou deI'image. , Verifiezlesconnexionsdescb,bleset refaitesles branchements.<br />

, Laperteduson oude I'imagepaut_trecauseepar Futilisationde cablestroprigidesoutrop @ais.Assurez-<br />

vousque lescablessontsuffisammentsouplespour uneutilisationL_longterme.Pourla fixationmurale,nous<br />

recommandonsI'utilisationdecb,blesavecdesconnecteursa 90degr@.<br />

Vousremarquezde petitesparticulesen<br />

examinantminutieusement le borddu cadre<br />

o Oelafar partiede laconceptiondu produitet ne construepasun ddaut.<br />

entourantFecrandutel@iseur.<br />

Unebannierepublicitaireinternedutel@iseur , SelectionnezI'optionUtil.a domicile apartirdu modePr6t a I'emploi. Pourdeplusamplesdetails,reportez-<br />

(POP)apparatta Fecran. vousL_lasectionPr6t a I'emploi(p. 8).<br />

Cet ecranTFT AOL utiliseun affichage constitue de pixels secondakesdont la production exige unetechnologie perfectionnee.II<br />

se peut toutefoisque certains pixelss'assombdssent ou soient plus lumineux a I'ecran. Oephenomene n'a aucune incidencesur la<br />

performancede I'appareik<br />

I Entreposageet entretien<br />

4 Frangais


SrS_" TruSurroundHD, SRSand _:_ symbolare trademarksof SRS Labs, Inc.<br />

TruSurreundHD TruSurroundHD technology is incorporatedunder licensefrom SRSLabs, Inc.<br />

Avis de licencerelative &I'exploitationlibre<br />

Fabriquesous licencede Dolby Laboratories.Dolbyet lesymbole double D sent des marquesde<br />

commercede DolbyLaboratories.<br />

Dansles cas ell un Iogicielde sourcelibreest utilise,les licencesrelativesa la source libresent disponiblesdansle menudes produits.<br />

L'avisde licenceconcernant I'exploitationlibren'est r6digequ'en anglais.<br />

Resolution 1920 x 1080<br />

Facteurs environnementaux<br />

Temperaturede fonctionnement 50°F a 104°F (10°C a 40°(})<br />

Niveau d'humidite en fonctionnement 10% 'a80%, sans condensation<br />

Temperatured'entrePosage d°F 'a 113°F (- 20°C a 45°C)<br />

Niveau d'humidite en entrepesage 5% a • %0, _ o/ sans condensation<br />

Support pivotant (gauche/droite) -20° - 20°<br />

Taillede I'ecran 40 pouces<br />

81agonale) (40.0 pouces en diagonale)<br />

Sor<br />

sortie 10 W X 2<br />

Dimenslor s/Lx P x H_<br />

Bdtier 38.2 X 3.1 X 23.3 pouces<br />

(970.0 X 78.6 X 591.3 mm)<br />

Avec sursr3ert 38.2 X 9.5 X 25.7 pouces<br />

Poias<br />

(970.0 X 240.0 X 653.0 ram)<br />

Sans slJDOOr'[ 32.0 ]b (14.6 kg)<br />

Avec SUDDOrI 38.4 ]b (17.4 kg)<br />

Ledesign et ]esspecifications peuventfaire Fobjetde modificationssans preavis.<br />

Cet apparei]est un apparei]numerique de categorie B.<br />

Pourles caracteristiques d'alimentationet de consommationelectrique,voir I'etiquettefixee au produit.<br />

Frangais 35


Autreinformation<br />

[] Vue avant/Vue laterale"<br />

[] Panneau des prises / vue arriere<br />

® _® ® ®i®<br />

0<br />

v<br />

I--o-4<br />

(Unite:pouces)<br />

(Unite:pouces)<br />

REMARQUE:Lesdesslnsne sont pas necessairementa I'echelle.Certainesdimensionspourraient6tre modl%essails preavls.Veriflezles<br />

dimensionsavant d'installervotre t61eviseur.Nousne sommespas responsablesdes erreursde typographieou d'impression.<br />

© 2010 SamsungElectronicsAmerica,Inc<br />

6 Frangais


A H 0<br />

Antenne I4 Haut-parleurdu tel6viseur 20 Outils<br />

AUDIOOUT 11 Haut-parleurexterne 20<br />

Autodiagnostic 24 HDMI 9 p<br />

B<br />

Horloge 20<br />

Photos<br />

Piles<br />

BackgroundMusic(Musiquede fond) 28<br />

BalanceG/D I9<br />

Branchementa un appareilaudio 11<br />

Branchementd'un PC I2<br />

C<br />

Changerde NIP 22<br />

Chaud 17<br />

Cinemamaison 11<br />

Cle USB 25<br />

Composantes 10<br />

Contrastedynamique 17<br />

D<br />

D@annage 32<br />

Diaporama 25<br />

DIG%¢LAUDIO OUT I1<br />

D-Sub I2<br />

Dynamique I6<br />

E<br />

Economiseurenergie 23<br />

Egaliseur I9<br />

Entrer lenora 13<br />

Equilibragedes blancs 17<br />

F<br />

Formatd'image 17<br />

Frequence I2<br />

I<br />

Pr@ta I'emploi<br />

indicateurd'aiimentation 6 Puissancedu signal<br />

Installationde Space 2<br />

R<br />

L<br />

.................................................................................................................................................................<br />

ReglageAutomatique<br />

I8<br />

Langue 22 Reglageautomatiquedu volume I9<br />

Licence 35 R@eterlamusique<br />

27<br />

Listesource 13 Resolutionoptimale<br />

12<br />

Luminosite 16 Rotation<br />

26<br />

M S<br />

Media Play 25 Selectionerle haut-parleur<br />

Melodie 23 Selectionnertout<br />

Memorisationdes canaux 14 Specificationstechniques<br />

Menudes canaux 14 Support d'obturation<br />

Minuterie 20 Support mural<br />

Mise_tniveaudu Iogiciel 24 Symboles<br />

Miseen veille 20 Syntonisationprecise<br />

Mode Film 18<br />

Modeveille 6 T<br />

Modificationdescanaux 15<br />

Tel6commande<br />

Mono 19<br />

Musique 27 Ton chair<br />

Tonalitenoire<br />

ToucheFAV.CH<br />

N Touclle ON/OFF<br />

Navigation 13<br />

Nettete 16<br />

Nuancecouleur 17<br />

V<br />

26<br />

7<br />

8<br />

24<br />

20<br />

I5<br />

35<br />

29<br />

29<br />

3<br />

I6<br />

I7<br />

I7<br />

7<br />

7,14<br />

7<br />

Volume 6<br />

Francais 37


Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE<br />

if you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact <strong>the</strong> SAMSUNG customer care center.<br />

Comment contacter Samsung darts le monde<br />

Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung, veuillez contacter le Service Consommateurs<br />

Samsung.<br />

Comuniquese con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE<br />

Si desea formular alguna pregunta o comentario en relaci6n con los productos de Samsung, comuniquese con el centro de<br />

atenci6n al cliente de SAMSUNG.<br />

CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com Samsung Electronics Canada Inc., Customer Service<br />

55 Standish Court Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4B2<br />

Canada<br />

U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com Samsung Electronics America, Inc. 85 Challenger<br />

© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.<br />

Road Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660-2112<br />

I<br />

BN68-0321gA-01<br />

t==<br />

O<br />

-"4<br />

<<br />

.=_<br />

3

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!